DIVISION OF FORESTRY AND WILDLIFE
State of Hawaii DEPARTMENT OF LAND AND NATURAL RESOURCES ENGINEERING DIVISION Honolulu, Hawaii
______
BOARD OF LAND AND NATURAL RESOURCES
Suzanne D. Case Chairperson
CONTRACT SPECIFICATIONS AND PLANS
Job No. D00CO68C DOFAW KAWAINUI MARSH BASEYARD IMPROVEMENTS KAILUA, OAHU, HAWAII
FEBRUARY 2018
Job No. D00CO68C
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page(s)
NOTICE TO BIDDERS ...... iii
INFORMATION AND INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS ...... I-1
PROPOSAL ...... P-1
SPECIAL PROVISIONS ...... SP-1
DETAILED SPECIFICATIONS ...... S-1
PLANS (Bound Separately)
DEPARTMENT OF LAND AND NATURAL RESOURCES INTERIM GENERAL CONDITIONS, DATED OCTOBER 1994 (Bound Separately)
Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C NOTICE TO BIDDERS (Chapter 103D, HRS)
COMPETITIVE BIDS for Job No. D00CO68C, DOFAW Kawainui Baseyard Improvements, Kailua, Oahu, Hawaii shall be submitted to the Department of Land and Natural Resources, Engineering Division on the specified date and time through the Hawaii State e-Procurement (HIePRO). HIePRO is accessible through the State Procurement Office website at www.spo.hawaii.gov .
The Department of Land and Natural Resources Interim General Condition, dated October 1994, as amended, and the General Conditions –AG008, latest revision shall be made part of the specifications.
The project is located at the DOFAW Kawainui Marsh Baseyard, Kailua, Oahu, Hawaii.
The work shall generally consist of the construction of a storage building, including all materials, tools, equipment, labor and other incidental work necessary, as required or called for in this Proposal, Specifications and Plans.
Due to the nature of work contemplated, bidders must possess a valid State Contractor’s license, classification B.
A voluntary pre-bid conference and site visit will be held at the Kawainui Marsh Baseyard, located at 739 Ulukahiki Street, Kailua, Hawaii, on April 12, 2018, at 10:00 A.M. Due to the secured site, attendance to the pre-bid conference and site visit is highly recommended.
The estimated cost of construction is $475,000.
The award of the contract, if it be awarded, will be subject to the availability of funds.
This project is subject to preference to Hawaii Products established by Section 103D, Hawaii Revised Statutes. The Hawaii Product List may be examined at the State Procurement Office website.
Since the estimated cost of construction is $250,000 or more, the apprenticeship agreement preference pursuant to Hawaii Revised Statutes §103-55.6 (ACT 17, SLH 2009) shall apply.
Should there be any questions, please refer to the HIePRO solicitation.
iii
INFORMATION AND INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
CONTENTS
Page
A Project Location and Scope of Work ...... I-2 B Proposals ...... I-2 C General Conditions ...... I-2 D Proposal Form ...... I-2 E Omissions or Erasures ...... I-2 F Notice of Intent to Bid and Questionnaire ...... I-2 G Bid Security ...... I-2 H Contractor’s License Required ...... I-2 I Irregular Bids ...... I-3 J Withdrawal of Bids ...... I-3 K Successful Bidder to File Performance and Payment Bonds ...... I-3 L Number of Executed Original Counterparts of Contract Documents ...... I-3 M Change Orders ...... I-3 N Wages and Hours ...... I-3 O Permits ...... I-3 P Property Damage ...... I-4 Q Time ...... I-4 R Bidder's Responsibility to Provide Proper Superintendence ...... I-4 S Liquidated Damages ...... I-4 T Hiring of Hawaii Residents ...... I-4 U Water and Electricity ...... I-5 V Public Convenience and Safety ...... I-5 W Work to be Done Without Direct Payment ...... I-5 X As-Built Drawings ...... I-5 Y Asbestos Containing Materials ...... I-5 Z Worker Safety ...... I-5 AA Toilet Facilities ...... I-6 BB Signs ...... I-6 CC Field Office for Department ...... I-6 DD Quantities ...... I-6 EE Other Health Measures ...... I-6 FF Hawaii Business Requirement ...... I-6 GG Compliance With §3-122-112 HAR ...... I-7
I-1
INFORMATION AND INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
A. PROJECT LOCATION AND SCOPE OF WORK: The project location and scope of work shall be as generally described in the Notice to Bidders.
B. PROPOSALS : Bidders shall submit their bid, including the completed proposal form, bid bond, and any other documents required by the solicitation as part of their bid through the State of Hawaii e-Procurement System (HIePRO). See Item D, PROPOSAL FORM.
C. GENERAL CONDITIONS: The Department of Land and Natural Resources Interim General Conditions dated October 1994, as amended, shall be made a part of these contract specifications and are referred to hereafter as the General Conditions.
D. PROPOSAL FORM: The Bidders shall fill out and upload the electronic copy of the proposal form to the HIePRO website when submitting the bid. Bid Proposals shall not be mailed, faxed or delivered to the State, unless requested to do so after the designated closing date. The successful Bidder shall fill out and print a hard copy of the proposal form, sign and submit the form with the contract award package.
E. OMISSIONS OR ERASURES: Any proposal which contains any omission or erasure or alteration not properly initialed, or conditional bid, or other irregularity may be rejected by the Board of Land and Natural Resources (Board).
F. NOTICE OF INTENT TO BID AND QUESTIONNAIRE: A Notice of Intent to Bid is not required for this project. In compliance with HRS Section 103D-310, the lowest responsive and responsible bidder may be required to complete a questionnaire. When requested by the State, the completed questionnaire shall be submitted to the Chief Engineer for evaluation. Failure to furnish the requested information within the time allowed may be grounds for a determination of non-responsibility, in accordance with HRS Section 103D-310 and HAR Section 3-122-108.
G. BID SECURITY: A bid security will be furnished by each bidder as provided in sub-section 2.7 of the General Conditions. The successful bidder's bid security will be retained until Contract execution and furnished a performance and payment bond in an amount equal to one hundred percent (100%) of the total Contract price, including an amount estimated to be required for extra work, is furnished.
The Board reserves the right to hold the bid securities of the four lowest bidders until the successful bidder has entered into a contract and has furnished the required performance bond. All bid securities will be returned in accordance with sub-section 3.5 of the General Conditions.
Should the successful bidder fail to enter into a contract and furnish a satisfactory performance bond within the time stated in the proposal, the bid security shall be forfeited as required by law.
I-2
H. CONTRACTOR'S LICENSE REQUIRED: The Board will reject all bids received from contractors who have not been licensed by the State Contractors License Board in accordance with Chapter 444, HRS; Title 16, Chapter 77, Hawaii Administrative Rules; and statutes amendatory thereto.
I. IRREGULAR BIDS: No irregular bids or propositions for doing the work will be considered by the Board.
J. WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS: No bidder may withdraw his bid between the time of the opening thereof and the award of contract.
K. SUCCESSFUL BIDDER TO FILE PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BONDS: The successful bidder will be required to file performance and payment bonds each; in the amount equal to the total contract price, including amounts estimated to be required for extra work, as provided in sub-section 3.6 of the General Conditions.
L. NUMBER OF EXECUTED ORIGINAL COUNTERPARTS OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: If requested by the Board, six copies of the Contract, performance and payment bonds shall be executed.
M. CHANGE ORDERS: No work of any kind in connection with the work covered by the plans and specifications shall be considered as change order work, or entitle the Contractor to extra compensation, except when the work has been ordered in writing by the Chief Engineer (Engineer) and in accordance with sub-section 4.2 of the General Conditions.
The Contractor shall clearly identify and inform the Engineer in writing of any deviations from the contract documents at the time of submission and shall obtain the Engineer's written approval to the specified deviation prior to proceeding with any work.
N. WAGES AND HOURS: In accordance with sub-sections 7.3 to 7.9 of the General Conditions relative to hours of labor, minimum wages and overtime pay, the current minimum wage rates promulgated by the Department of Labor and Industrial Relations (DLIR) shall be paid to the various classes of laborers and mechanics engaged in the performance of this contract on the job site. The minimum wages shall be increased during the performance of the contract in an amount equal to the increase in the prevailing wages for those kinds of work as periodically determined by the DLIR.
The Department of Land and Natural Resources will not recognize any claim for additional compensation because of the payment by the Contractor of any wage rate in excess of the said minimum wage rates. The possibility of wage increase is one of the elements to be considered by the Contractor in determining his bid, and will not, under any circumstances, be considered as the basis of a claim against the Department under this Contract.
No work shall be done on Saturdays, Sundays, legal State holidays, and/or in excess of eight (8) hours each day without the written consent of the Engineer. Should permission be granted to work at such times, the Contractor shall pay for all inspection administrative costs thereof. No work shall be done at night unless authorized by the Engineer.
I-3
O. PERMITS: The State will process permit applications whenever possible, and the Contractor shall procure the pre-processed permits and pay the required fees. If permit applications are not processed by the State, the Contractor shall process the permit applications, permits and licenses, and pay all charges and fees. In all cases, the Contractor shall give all notices necessary and incident to the due and lawful prosecution of the work.
P. PROPERTY DAMAGE: It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to respect State property and to prevent damage to existing improvements. The Contractor will be responsible for damages resulting from construction operations. Immediately upon discovery, the Contractor shall repair such damage to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
All trees and shrubbery outside the excavation, embankment or construction limits shall be fully protected from injury.
Q. TIME: The time of completion is specified in the Proposal. It is the Board's intention to insist the Contractor diligently prosecute the work to completion within the specified time.
Prospective bidders are reminded that the State has the option to proceed with or abandon a project depending on whether the project can be completed for occupancy in the specified time.
It is the bidder's responsibility to check the availability of all materials before bidding. The bidder shall select sub-contractors and suppliers who can warrant availability and delivery of all specified or qualified materials to assure project completion within the specified time.
The successful bidder must assume all risks for completing the project by the specified date. There shall be no extension of time for any reason except for delays caused by acts of God, labor disputes involving unions, or actions of the State. If for any reason the project falls behind schedule, the Contractor shall at its own cost, take necessary remedial measures to get the project back on schedule, i.e., working overtime, air freighting all materials, etc. In addition, if the Contractor fails to fully complete the project by the completion date, Contractor will be required to make the facility usable at its own cost.
R. BIDDER'S RESPONSIBILITY TO PROVIDE PROPER SUPERINTENDENCE: The successful low bidder shall designate in writing to the Engineer the name of its authorized superintendent (Superintendent), who will be present at the job site whenever any work is in progress. The Superintendent shall be responsible for all work, receiving and implementing instructions from the Engineer in a timely manner. The cost for superintendence shall be considered incidental to the project.
If the Superintendent is not present at the site of work, the Engineer shall have the right to suspend the work as described under sub-section 5.5 c. and 7.20 - Suspension of Work of the General Conditions.
S. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES: Liquidated damages in the amount specified in the Proposal will be assessed for each and every calendar day from and after the expiration of the time period stated in the Contract for the completion of the project.
I-4
T. HIRING OF HAWAII RESIDENTS: The Contractor shall comply with Act 68, SLH 2010, in the performance and for the duration of this contract. The Contractor shall ensure that Hawaii residents compose not less than eighty percent of the workforce employed to perform the contract work on the project. The eighty percent requirement shall be determined by dividing the total number of hours worked on the contract by Hawaii residents, by the total number of hours worked on the contract by all employees of the Contractor in the performance of the contract. The hours worked by any Subcontractor of the Contractor shall count towards the calculation for this section. The hours worked by employees with shortage trades, as determined by the Department of Labor and Industrial Relations (DLIR), shall not be included in the calculation for this section.
The requirements shall apply to any subcontract of $50,000 or more in connection with the Contractor, that is, such Subcontractors must also ensure that Hawaii residents compose not less than eighty percent of the Subcontractor’s workforce used to perform the subcontract.
U. WATER AND ELECTRICITY: The Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements and pay all expenses for water and electricity used in the construction of this project.
V. PUBLIC CONVENIENCE AND SAFETY: The Contractor shall conduct construction operations with due regard to the convenience and safety of the public at all times. No materials or equipment shall be stored where it will interfere with the safe passage of public traffic. The Contractor shall provide, install, and maintain in satisfactory condition, all necessary signs, flares and other protective facilities and shall take all necessary precautions for the protection of the work and the convenience and safety of the public. The Engineer shall have the right to suspend the performance of the work in accordance with sub-section 7.20 - Suspension of Work of the General Conditions.
W. WORK TO BE DONE WITHOUT DIRECT PAYMENT: Whenever the contract that the Contractor is to perform work or furnish materials of any kind for which no price is fixed in the contract, it shall be understood that the Contractor shall perform such work or furnish said materials without extra charge or allowance or direct payment of any sort. The cost of performing such work or furnishing said material is to be included by the Contractor in a unit price for the appropriate item unless it is expressly specified that such work or material is to be paid for as extra work.
X. AS-BUILT DRAWINGS: As-built drawings, the intent of which is to record the actual in- place construction so that any future renovations or tie-ins can be anticipated accurately, shall be required. All authorizations given by the Engineer to deviate from the plans shall be drawn on the job site plans. All deviations from alignments, elevations and dimensions which are stipulated on the plans shall be recorded on the as-built drawings. Final as-built drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer for review and approval. After the Engineer approves the as-built drawings, the contractor shall submit an electronic copy in Adobe PDF format on CD ROM.
Y. ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIALS: The use of asbestos containing materials or equipment is prohibited. The Contractor shall insure that all materials and equipment incorporated in the project are asbestos-free.
I-5
Z WORKER SAFETY: The Contractor shall provide, install and maintain in satisfactory condition all necessary protective facilities and shall take all necessary precautions for the protection and safety of its workers in accordance with the Occupational Safety and Health Standards for the State of Hawaii. The Engineer shall have the right to suspend the performance of the work in accordance with sub-section 7.20 - Suspension of Work of the General Conditions.
AA. TOILET FACILITIES: All toilet facilities constructed at the project site shall be in accordance with the Public Health Regulations of the State Department of Health (DOH). All necessary precautions shall be observed at the project site. The use of sanitary facilities shall be strictly enforced and workers violating these provisions shall be promptly discharged.
BB. SIGNS: Whenever the project involves closing or obstructing any public thoroughfare, the Contractor shall provide traffic signs conforming to the applicable provisions of the current edition of the "Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways", published by the Federal Highway Administration as directed by the Engineer for the purpose of diverting or warning traffic prior to the construction area. All traffic signs shall bear proper wording stating thereon the necessary information as to diverting or warning traffic.
When indicated in the Proposal, the Contractor shall provide a project sign, size 4'-0" x 7'-0" to be placed as directed by the Engineer. The sign shall be constructed in accordance with Section 01581 - Project Sign of these specifications and approved by the Engineer. All wording, type and size of lettering and color selection shall be as specified in these specifications or as approved by the Engineer.
All signs shall be kept neat and clean, and properly erected at all times.
CC. FIELD OFFICE AREA FOR DEPARTMENT: When indicated in the Proposal, the Contractor shall provide a housed working area of at least 100 square feet adjacent to the Contractor's office for the Department's use. This area will be used by the Engineer to perform tests and to store equipment. As a minimum, the field office shall include the following: standard sized office desk and chair, lighting, ventilation, window-type air conditioning rated at 5,000 BTU, door and window with locking hardware, electrical outlets, and working communications facilities (a cellular telephone is acceptable). The Department will pay for all long distance toll charges made by the Engineer.
DD. QUANTITIES: All bids will be compared on the basis of quantities of work to be done as shown in the Proposal; the quantities shown in the Unit Price items are estimated, being given as a basis for comparison of bids. The Board reserves the right to increase or decrease the quantities given under the items or delete items entirely as may be required during the progress of the work.
EE. OTHER HEALTH MEASURES: Forms of work site exposure or conditions which may be detrimental to the health or welfare of workers or of the general public shall be eliminated or reduced to safe levels as required by the DOH codes, standards, and regulations. Suitable first aid kits and a person qualified to render first aid, as specified in the DOH regulations, shall be provided at all times when work is scheduled.
I-6
FF. HAWAII BUSINESS OR COMPLIANT NON-HAWAII BUSINESS REQUIREMENT: Bidders (Contractors) shall be incorporated or organized under the laws of the State or be registered to do business in the State as a separate branch or division that is capable of fully performing under the contract, as stipulated in §3-122-112 HAR.
GG. COMPLIANCE WITH §3-122-112 HAR: As a condition for award of the contract and as proof of compliance with the requirements of 103D-310(c) HRS, the apparent low bidder shall furnish the required documents to the Department. If the valid required certificates are not submitted on a timely basis for award of a contract, a bidder otherwise responsive and responsible may not receive the award. Bidder is responsible to apply for and submit the following documents to the Department.
A. TAX CLEARANCE REQUIREMENTS (HRS Chapter 237): Bidder shall obtain a tax clearance certificate from the Hawaii State Department of Taxation (DOTAX) and the Internal Revenue Service (IRS). The certificate is valid for six months from the most recently approved stamp date on the certificate; the certificate must be valid on the date received by the Department.
B. Department of Labor (DLIR) “ Certificate of Compliance ”. (HRS Chapter 383 - Unemployment Insurance, Chapter 386 - Workers’ Compensation, Chapter 392 - Temporary Disability Insurance, and 393 – Prepaid Health Care): Bidder shall obtain a certificate of compliance from the Hawaii State Department of Labor and Industrial relations (DLIR). The certificate is valid for six months from the date of issue; certificates must be valid on the date received by the Department.
C. Department of Commerce and Consumer Affairs (DCCA), Business Registration Division (BREG) “ Certificate of Good Standing ”. Bidder shall obtain a certificate of good standing issued by the Department of Commerce and Consumer Affairs (DCCA), Business Registration Division (BREG). The certificate of good standing is valid for six months from the date of issue; certificates must be valid on the date received by the Department.
Alternately, instead of separately applying for these certificates at the various state agencies, bidder may choose to use the Hawaii Compliance Express (HCE), which allows businesses to register online through a simple wizard interface at http://vendors.ehawaii.gov to acquire a “Certificate of Vendor Compliance” indicating the bidder’s status is compliant with the requirements of §103D-310(c), HRS, and shall be accepted for contracting and final payment purposes. Bidders that elect to use the new HCE services will be required to pay an annual fee of $12.00 to the Hawaii Information Consortium, LLC (HIC). Bidders choosing not to participate in the HCE program will be required to provide the paper certificates as instructed in the previous paragraphs.
I-7
PROPOSAL FOR DEPARTMENT OF LAND AND NATURAL RESOURCES ENGINEERING DIVISION State of Hawaii
JOB NO. D00C068C DOFAW KAWAINUI MARSH BASEYARD IMPROVEMENTS KAILUA, HAWAII
______, 2018 Chief Engineer Engineering Division Department of Land and Natural Resources State of Hawaii Honolulu, Hawaii
Dear Sir:
The undersigned, having carefully examined the local conditions and all available records and information covering conditions which may affect the cost of the work to be performed, and having carefully examined the Plans and Specifications, and other contract documents, hereby proposes to furnish and pay for all materials, tools, equipment, labor, and other incidental work necessary to construct the Storage Building, and perform related miscellaneous work, as required or called for in this Proposal, all according to the true intent and meaning of the Notice to Bidders, Information and Instructions to Bidders, Proposal, Detailed Specifications, Interim General Conditions, Plans, and any and all addenda for:
JOB NO. D00CO68C DOFAW KAWAINUI MARSH BASEYARD IMPROVEMENTS KAILUA, HAWAII on file in the office of the Engineering Division for the TOTAL SUM BASE BID (Items 1 to 6, inclusive) of:
______
______Dollars ($ ______) and will fully complete all work under this contract within 300 consecutive calendar days from the date of written notice to proceed, including date of said order, and total sum being itemized on the following pages.
P - 1
BASE BID
Item Quantity Unit Description Unit Price Total No. Lump 1 Allowance Temporary Traffic Control Sum $ Lump 2 L.S. L.S. Demolish Temporary Structures Sum $ Lump 3 L.S. L.S. Erosion Control Sum $ Lump 4 L.S. L.S. Site Grading and Concrete Swale Sum $ Building (including tree trimming, structure, standing seam metal roof, retaining masonry walls, windows, louvers, overhead doors, signage, Lump 5 L.S. L.S. hose bibb, HECO meter, electrical Sum panel, outlets, lighting, painting and all materials and related work necessary to complete the project in accordance with the plans and specifications. $
Sub Sum Base Bid (Items 1 - 5, inclusive) $ ______
Mobilization and demobilization, not to Lump 6. L.S. L.S. exceed 10% of the sub sum base bid. Sum $
Total Sum Base Bid (Items 1 - 6, inclusive) $ ______
P - 2
HAWAII PRODUCTS PREFERENCE AND/OR USE OF HAWAII PRODUCTS
In accordance with Act 175, SLH 2009, the Hawaii products preference is applicable to this solicitation. Bidders offering a Hawaii product ("HP") shall identify the HP in the table below.
Persons desiring to qualify their product(s) not currently on the Hawaii Product List, shall complete Form SPO-38, Certification for Hawaii Product Preference , and submit the completed form no later than the deadline specified in the procurement notice and solicitation. The responsibility for certification and qualification shall rest upon the person requesting the preference. One form shall be completed and submitted for each product. Form SPO-38 is available at http://hawaii.gov/spo/goods-services-construction/preferences-103d-pt-x/hi- products/hawaii-product-preferences
For the purpose of selecting the low bid when a solicitation contains both HP and non-HP, the price offered for a HP item shall be decreased by subtracting 10% for the class I or 15% for the class II HP item(s) offered. The lowest total offer, taking the preference into consideration, shall be awarded the contract, unless the offer provides for additional award criteria. The contract amount of any contract awarded, however, shall be the amount of the price offered, exclusive of the preferences.
In the event of any change that materially alters the bidder’s ability to supply the Hawaii product(s), the bidder shall immediately notify the procurement officer in writing and the parties shall enter into discussions for the purpose of revising the contract or terminating the contract for convenience.
Item Pre-Approved Hawaii Product Class Unit Unit Total Quantity No. Description and Manufacturer (I or II) Measure Price Price
1.
2.
P - 3
Item Pre-Approved Hawaii Product Class Unit Unit Total Quantity No. Description and Manufacturer (I or II) Measure Price Price
3.
4.
RECYCLED PRODUCTS PREFERENCE This project allows a 10% price preference for recycled products in accordance with HRS 103D- 1005. Please indicate your recycled or non-recycled product by indicating its cost FOB jobsite unloaded in the schedule below, including applicable General Excise and Use Taxes.
RECYCLED NONRECYCLED DESCRIPTION PRODUCT COST PRODUCT COST
______$______$______$______$______$______$______$______$______
The bidder requesting a recycled product preference shall also complete and submit the form "CERTIFICATION OF RECYCLED CONTENT" as shown in the Interim General Conditions and provide all supporting information with this proposal. Additional information may be requested to qualify a product.
The following definitions are applicable to the CERTIFICATION OF RECYCLED CONTENT form:
"Post-consumer recovered material" means any product used by a consumer, including a business that purchases the material, that has served its intended end use, and that has been separated or diverted from the solid waste stream for the purpose of use, reuse, or recycling.
"Product" includes materials, manufactures, supplies, merchandise, goods, wares, and foodstuffs.
"Recovered material" means waste material and by-products that have been separated, diverted, or removed from the solid waste stream after a manufacturing process for the purpose of use, reuse, or recycling. Recovered material does not include those materials and by-products that are generated and normally reused on-site or within original manufacturing processes (such as mill broke, in the case of paper products).
"Recycled content" means the percentage of a product composed of recovered material, or post- consumer recovered material, or both.
"Recycled product" means a product containing recovered material, or post-consumer recovered material, or both.
The bidder agrees that preference for recycled products shall be taken into consideration to determine the low bidder in accordance with said Section and the rules promulgated, however, the award of contract will be in the amount of the bid offered exclusive any preference. P - 4
APPRENTICESHIP AGREEMENT PREFERENCE
1. If applicable to this project, any bidder seeking the preference must be a party to an apprenticeship agreement registered with the State Department of Labor and Industrial Relations (DLIR) at the time the bid is submitted for each apprenticeable trade the bidder will employ to construct the project. "Employ" means the employment of a person in an employer-employee relationship.
a. The apprenticeship agreement shall be registered with the DLIR and conform to the requirements of Hawaii Revised Statutes Chapter 372.
b. Subcontractors do not have to be a party to an apprenticeship agreement for the bidder to obtain preference.
c. The bidder is not required to have apprentices in its employ at the time the bid is submitted to qualify for the preference.
2. A bidder seeking the preference must state the apprenticeable trade the bidder will employ for each trade to be employed to perform the work by submitting a completed signed original Certification Form 1 verifying participation in an apprenticeship program registered with DLIR. "Apprenticeable trade" shall have the same meaning as "apprenticeable occupation" pursuant to Hawaii Administrative Rules (HAR) §12-30-5.
a. The Certification Form 1 shall be authorized by an apprenticeship sponsor listed on the DLIR list of registered apprenticeship programs. "Sponsor" means an operator of an apprenticeship program and in whose name the program is approved and registered with the DLIR pursuant to HAR §12-30-1.
b. The authorization shall be an original signature by an authorized official of the apprenticeship sponsor.
c. The completed signed original Certification Form 1 for each trade must be submitted with the bid. Previous certifications shall not apply.
d. When filling out the Certification Form 1 , the name of Apprenticeable Trade and Apprenticeship Sponsor must be the same as recorded in the List of Construction Trades in Registered Apprenticeship Programs that is posted on the DLIR website. "Registered apprenticeship program" means a construction trade program approved by the DLIR pursuant to HAR §12-301 and §12-30-4.
e. The Certificate Form 1 and the List of Construction Trades in Registered Apprenticeship Programs is available on the DLIR website at: http://hawaii.gov/labor/wdd.
3. Upon receiving the Certification Form 1 , the Procurement Officer will verify that the apprenticeship program is on the List of Construction Trades in Registered Apprenticeship Programs and that the form is signed by an authorized official of the Apprenticeship Program Sponsor. If the programs and signature are not confirmed by the DLIR, the bidder will not qualify for the preference.
P - 5
4. If the bidder is certified to participate in an apprenticeship program for each trade which will be employed by the bidder for the project, a preference will be applied to decrease the bidder’s bid amount by five percent (5%) for evaluation purposes.
5. Should the bidder qualify for other preferences (e.g. Hawaii Products), all applicable preferences shall be applied to the bid price.
CONTRIBUTIONS BY STATE AND COUNTY CONTRACTORS PROHIBITED Contractors are hereby notified of the applicability of Section 11-355, HRS, which states that campaign contributions are prohibited from specified State or county government contractors during the term of the contract if the contractors are paid with funds appropriated by a legislative body.
P - 6
CONDITION OF AWARD
It is understood that the award of the contract will be made on the basis of the lowest responsible Total Sum Base Bid (Items 1 to 6) selected by the Board of Land and Natural Resources. Write the total of bid items 1 to 6 on page P-2.
It is understood and agreed that the Board of Land and Natural Resources reserves the right to reject any and/or all bids and waive any defects when, in the Board's opinion, such rejection or waiver will be for the best interest of the State of Hawaii.
In the event all bids exceed available funds certified by the appropriate fiscal officer, the head of the purchasing agency responsible for the procurement in question is authorized in situations where time or economic considerations preclude solicitation of work of a reduced scope to negotiate an adjustment of the bid price, including changes in the bid requirements, with the low responsible and responsive bidder, in order to bring the bid within the amount of available funds. It is understood and agreed upon that the head of the purchasing agency may delete a portion or all of any item(s) in the proposal at the stated unit or lump sum price as necessary to stay within the available funding. The bidder is responsible to make an earnest effort to represent the actual cost of each item, including all materials, labor, equipment, overhead and profit in their bid proposal to preclude claims of anticipated profit or loss of profit because of an unbalanced bid proposal.
It is also understood that if a mutually agreeable cost for the reduced scope of work necessitated by a lack of available funds cannot be agreed upon between the bidder and the head of the purchasing agency within 14 calendar days after the bid opening, then the bid may be rejected in the best interest of the purchasing agency, and the head of the purchasing agency may negotiate in progressive order (lowest to highest) with the next lowest responsible and responsive bidder.
It is also understood and agreed that the award of the contract shall be conditioned upon funds being made available for this project and further upon the right of the Board of Land and Natural Resources to hold all bids received for a period of six (6) months from the date of the opening thereof, unless otherwise required by law, during which time no bid may be withdrawn.
It is also understood that Notice to Proceed may be delayed up to one (1) year after the bid opening date, and that no additional compensation will be provided for any claim for escalation or delay for issuance of Notice to Proceed on or before that date.
It is also understood and agreed that the quantities given herewith are approximate only and are subject to increase or decrease, and that the undersigned will perform all quantities of work as either increased or decreased, in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Specifications.
It is also understood and agreed that the estimated quantities shown for the items for which a UNIT PRICE is asked in this Proposal are only for the purpose of comparing on a uniform basis, bids offered for the work under this contract, and the undersigned agrees that he is satisfied with and will at no time, dispute said estimated quantities as a means of claims for anticipated profit or loss of profit, because of a difference between the quantities of the various classes of work done or the materials and equipment installed, and the said estimated quantities. On UNIT PRICE bids, payment will be made only for the actual number of units incorporated into the finished project at the contract UNIT PRICE.
After the proposals are opened and read, the figures will be extended and/or totaled in accordance with the bid prices of the acceptable proposals and the totals will be compared. In the comparison of bids, words written in the proposal shall govern over figures and unit prices will govern over
P - 7 totals. Until the award of the contract, however, the right will be reserved to reject any and all proposals and to waive any defects or technicalities as may be deemed best for the interest of the State.
It is also understood and agreed that liquidated damages in the amount of One Hundred Fifty Dollars and No Cents ($150.00) for each and every calendar day in excess thereof prior to completion of the contract shall be withheld from payments due to the Contractor.
It is also understood and agreed that if this bid is accepted, the successful bidder must enter into and execute a contract with the Board of Land and Natural Resources and furnish a Performance and Payment Bond, as required by law. These bonds shall conform to provisions of Section 103D-324 and 325, Hawaii Revised Statutes and any law applicable hereto.
It is also understood and agreed that the successful bidder will provide all necessary labor, materials, tools, equipment, and other incidentals necessary to do all the work and furnish all the materials specified in the contract in the manner and time herein prescribed, and according to the requirements of the Engineer as therein set forth.
It is understood that by submitting this proposal, the undersigned is declaring that his firm has not been assisted or represented on this matter by an individual who has, in a State capacity, been involved in the subject matter of this contract in the past two years.
It is understood that by submitting this proposal in accordance with HAR 3-122-192, the undersigned is declaring that the price submitted is independently arrived without collusion.
It is also understood that by submitting this proposal, a Certification for Safety and Health Programs for bids in excess of $100,000 (in accordance with HRS 396-18), the undersigned certifies that his organization will have a written safety and health plan for this project that will be available and implemented by the Notice to Proceed date of this project. Details of the requirements of this plan may be obtained from the Department of Labor and Industrial Relations, Occupational, Safety and Health Division (HIOSH).
It is further understood and agreed that the successful bidder shall comply with paragraph 3.1.a "SUBCONTRACTING" of the General Provisions which requires that the contractor shall perform with his own organization and with the assistance of workmen under his immediate superintendence, work of a value not less than twenty percent (20%) of the value of all work embraced in the Contract, except that certain contract items of work, if specifically referred to in the special provisions, will be exempted from said twenty percent requirement.
Compliance with §103-310 HRS. As a condition of award all bidders shall comply with all laws governing entities doing business in the State, including Chapter 237 HRS (general excise tax); Chapter 383 HRS (employment security – unemployment insurance); Chapter 386 HRS (workers compensation); Chapter 392 HRS (temporary disability insurance); and Chapter 393 HRS (pre- paid health care), and shall produce all documents to the State (DLNR, Engineering Division) required to demonstrate compliance with these subsections. Any bidder making a false affirmation or certification under this subsection shall be suspended and may be debarred from further offerings or awards pursuant to §103D-702 HRS.
P - 8
RECEIPT OF ADDENDA
The bidder also acknowledges receipt of any and all addenda issued by the Engineering Division, by recording the date of receipt of the respective addenda in the space provided below:
Addendum Date Received Addendum Date Received
No. 1 ______No. 5 ______No. 2 ______No. 6 ______No. 3 ______No. 7 ______No. 4 ______No. 8 ______
It is understood that failure to receive any such addendum shall not relieve the Contractor from any obligation under this Proposal as submitted.
It is also understood and agreed that if this Proposal is accepted and the undersigned should fail or neglect to contract as aforesaid, the Board may determine that the bidder has abandoned the Contract, and thereupon, forfeiture of the security accompanying his proposal shall operate and the same shall become the property of the Board.
P - 9
JOINT CONTRACTORS OR SUBCONTRACTORS TO BE ENGAGED ON THIS PROJECT
The Bidder agrees that the following is a complete listing of all joint contractors or subcontractors covered under Chapter 444, Hawaii Revised Statutes (HRS), who will be engaged by the Bidder on this project to perform the required work indicated pursuant to Section 103D-302, HRS. It is the sole responsibility of the contractor to review the requirements of this Project and determine the appropriate licenses that are required to complete the Project. The Bidder certifies that the completed listing of joint contractors or subcontractors fulfills the requirements for the project and the Bidder, together with the listed subcontractors or joint contractors have all the specialty contractor’s licenses to complete the work, except as provided for in HRS §103D-302(b). Failure of the Bidder to comply with this requirement may be just cause for rejection of the bid.
"A" General Engineering Contractors and "B" General Building Contractors are reminded that due to the Hawaii Supreme Court’s January 28, 2002 decision in Okada Trucking Co., Ltd. v. Board of Water Supply, et al., 97 Haw. 450 (2002), they are prohibited from undertaking any work, solely or as part of a larger project, which would require the general contractor to act as a specialty contractor in any area in which the general contractor has no license. Although the "A" and "B" contractor may still bid on and act as the "prime" contractor on an "A" or "B" project (See, HRS §444-7 for the definitions of an "A" and "B" project .), respectively, the "A" and "B" contractor may only perform work in the areas in which they have the appropriate contractor’s license ( An "A" or "B" contractor obtains "C" specialty contractor’s licenses either on its own, or automatically under HAR § 16-77-32 ). The remaining work must be performed by appropriately licensed entities.
General Engineering "A" Contractors automatically have these "C" specialty contractor’s licenses: C-3, C-9, C-10, C-17, C-24, C-31a, C-32, C-35, C-37a, C-37b, C-38, C-43, C-49, C- 56, C-57a, C-57b and C-61.
General Building "B" Contractors automatically have these "C" specialty contractor’s licenses: C-5, C-6, C-10, C-12, C-24, C-25, C-31a, C-32a, C-42a and C-42b.
In completing the Joint Contractors or Subcontractors List, describe the specialty contractor’s nature and scope of work to be performed for this project and provide the complete firm name of the joint contractor or subcontractor in the respective columns. If the Bidder is a general contractor providing the work of a required specialty contractor, whose license is not automatically held pursuant to HAR 16-77-32, fill in the Bidder’s (general contractor’s) name and nature and scope of work to be performed on this project.
List only one joint contractor or subcontractor per required specialty contractor’s classification, unless within the same specialty, the work of each joint contractor or subcontractor can be described so that there is no overlap in work descriptions.
If a contractor’s license is required by law for the performance of the work which is called for in this bid, the bidder and all subcontractors must have the required license before the submission of the bidder’s proposal in the case of a non-federal aid project, and for federal-aid projects, the bidder must have the required license prior to the award of the project and all subcontractors prior to the start of the subcontracted work.
P - 10
COMPLETE FIRM NAME OF JOINT NATURE AND SCOPE OF WORK TO BE CONTRACTOR OR SUBCONTRACTOR PERFORMED
P - 11
Enclosed herewith is a:
1. Surety Bond (*1) ) 2. Legal Tender (*2) ) 3. Cashier's Check (*3) ) 4. Certificate of Deposit (*3) ) in the 5. Certified Check (*3) ) amount 6. Official Check (*3) ) of 7. Share Certificate (*3) ) 8. Teller's Check (*3) ) 9. Treasurer's Check (*3) ) (Cross Out Those Not Applicable)
______
______Dollars ($______) as required by law.
Respectfully submitted,
______Name of Company, Joint Venture or Partnership
______Contractor's License No.
By ______Signature (*4)
Title ______Print Name ______Date ______Address ______Telephone No. ______
E-Mail Address ______
P - 12
NOTES:
1. Surety bond underwritten by a company licensed to issue bonds in this State;
2. Legal tender; or
3. A certificate of deposit; share certificate; or cashier's, treasurer's, teller's, or official check drawn by, or a certified check accepted by, and payable on demand to the State by a bank, a savings institution, or credit union insured by the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation or the National Credit Union Administration.
A. These instruments may be utilized only to a maximum of $100,000.
B. If the required security or bond amount totals over $100,000, more than one instrument not exceeding $100,000 each and issued by different financial institutions shall be accepted.
4. Please attach to this page evidence of the authority of this officer to submit bids on behalf of the Company and also the names and residence addresses of all officers of the Company.
5. Fill in all blank spaces with information asked for or bid may be invalidated. PROPOSAL MUST BE INTACT, MISSING PAGES MAY INVALIDATE YOUR BID.
END OF PROPOSAL
P - 13 SPECIAL PROVISIONS
Amend INTERIM GENERAL CONDITIONS, dated October 1994, as follows:
Section 2 – Proposal Requirements and Conditions
1. AMEND Section 2.1 Qualification of Bidder with the following:
Written Notice of Intent to Bid or Offer: A written Notice of Intent to Bid is not required for the Solicitation.
Standard Qualification Questionnaire: Bidders may be required to complete a standard qualifications questionnaire. When requested, the information shall be furnished within two working days or longer at the discretion of the Engineer. Failure to furnish the requested information within the time allowed may be grounds for a determination of non-responsibility, in accordance with HRS Section 103D-310 and HAR Section 3-122-108.
Hawaii Business or Compliant Non-Hawaii Business Requirement: Bidders shall be incorporated or organized under the laws of the State or be registered to do business in the State as a separate branch or division that is capable of fully performing under the contract, as stipulated in §3-122- 112 HAR. A certified letter is not required prior to bid opening.
Compliance with §3-122-112 HAR: As a condition for award of the contract and as proof of compliance with the requirements of 103D-310(c) HRS, the apparent low bidder shall furnish the required documents to the Department. If the valid required certificates are not submitted on a timely basis for award of a contract, a bidder otherwise responsive and responsible may not receive the award. Bidder is responsible to apply for and submit the following documents to the Department.
A. Tax Clearance (HRS Chapter 237): Bidder shall obtain a tax clearance certificate from the Hawaii State Department of Taxation (DOTAX) and the Internal Revenue Service (IRS). The certificate is valid for six months from the most recently approved stamp date on the certificate; the certificate must be valid on the date received by the Department.
B. Department of Labor (DLIR) “Certificate of Compliance”. (HRS Chapter 383 - Unemployment Insurance, Chapter 386 - Workers’ Compensation, Chapter 392 - Temporary Disability Insurance, and 393 – Prepaid Health Care): Bidder shall obtain a certificate of compliance from the Hawaii State Department of Labor and Industrial relations (DLIR). The certificate is valid for six months from the date of issue; certificates must be valid on the date received by the Department.
C. Department of Commerce and Consumer Affairs (DCCA), Business Registration Division (BREG) “Certificate of Good Standing”. Bidder shall obtain a certificate of good standing issued by the Department of Commerce and Consumer Affairs (DCCA), Business Registration Division (BREG). The certificate of good standing is valid for six months from the date of issue; certificates must be valid on the date received by the Department.
Hawaii Compliance Express. Alternately, instead of separately applying for these certificates at the various state agencies, bidder may choose to use the Hawaii Compliance Express (HCE), which allows businesses to register online through a simple wizard interface at http://vendors.ehawaii.gov to acquire a “Certificate of Vendor compliance” indicating that bidder’s
SP-1 SpProvAmdSec HIePRO Aug2015.docx status is compliant with requirements of §103D-310(c), HRS, shall be accepted for contracting and final payment purposes. Bidders that elect to use the new HCE services will be required to pay an annual fee of $15.00 to the Hawaii Information Consortium, LLC (HIC). Bidders choosing not to participate in the HCE program will be required to provide the paper certificates as instructed in the previous paragraphs.
2. ADD Section 2.4a, Pre-Bid Conferences
Required Pre-bid Conferences: For construction and design-build projects with an estimated value of $500,000 or more and solicited under the competitive sealed bid method (103D-302 HRS); and for construction and design-build projects with an estimated value of $100,000 or more and solicited under the competitive sealed proposal method (103D-303 HRS); a pre-bid conference is required.
Other Pre-Bid Conferences: The Department may require a pre-bid conference for construction or design-build projects that are below the dollar threshold listed in above or when projects have special or unusual requirements.
Other Conditions: The Department may require the prospective Bidders to make a physical inspection of the project site and make attendance at the pre-bid conference a condition for submitting an offer.
Nothing stated at the pre-bid conference shall change the solicitation unless a change is made by written addendum.
3. DELETE Section 2.5, Addenda and Interpretations, in its entirety and replace with the following:
“Discrepancies, omissions, or doubts as to the meaning of drawings and specifications should be communicated using the question and answer section on the HIePRO solicitation for interpretation and must be received in the time frame set in the HIePRO solicitation. Any interpretation, if made and any supplemental instructions will be in the form of written addenda to the plans and specifications and made available prior to the offer due date. It shall be the prospective bidder’s sole responsibility to verify and obtain any said addenda. Failure of any bidder to receive any such addendum or interpretation shall not relieve such bidder from any obligation under his bid as submitted. All addenda so issued shall become part of the contract documents.”
Section 3 – Award and Execution of Contract
1. AMEND Section 3.3, Award of Contract, by deleting “sixty (60)” and replacing with “six (6) months (180)” in the first paragraph.
2. AMEND Section 3.3, Award of Contract, by adding the following after the first paragraph:
“If the contract is not awarded within the six (6) months, the Department may request the successful Bidder to extend the time for the acceptance of its bid. The Bidder may reject such a request without penalty; and in such case, the Department may at its sole discretion make a similar offer to the next lowest responsive and responsible bidder and so on until a bid is duly accepted or until the Department elects to stop making such requests.”
3. AMEND Section 3.9, Notice to Proceed, by deleting “180 days” and replacing with “one (1) year” in the last paragraph.
SP-2 SpProvAmdSec HIePRO Aug2015.docx
4. ADD Section 3.10, Protests:
“3.10 PROTESTS —Pursuant to Section 103D-701, Hawaii Revised Statutes, an actual or prospective offeror who is aggrieved in connection with the solicitation or award may submit a protest. Any protest shall be submitting in writing to the Chairperson, Department of Land and Natural Resources, 1151 Punchbowl Street, Honolulu, Hawaii 96813, or designee as specified in the solicitation.
A protest shall be submitted in writing within five (5) working days after the aggrieved person knows or should have known the facts giving rise thereto; provided that a protest based upon the content of the solicitation shall be submitted in writing prior to the date set for receipt of offers. Further provided that a protest of an award or proposed award shall be submitted within five (5) working days after the posting of the award of the contract.
The notice of award, if any, resulting from this solicitation shall be posted on the Procurement System on the SPO website: http://www.hawaii.gov/spo2/source/ .”
Section 5 – Control of Work
AMEND Section 5.8 Value Engineering Incentive by deleting “$100,000” and replacing with “$250,000” in the first paragraph.
Section 6 – Substitution of Materials and Equipment
ADD the following to Section 6.3 Sub-paragraph b:
4. If the substitution meets all the requirements of the specifications and plans.
Section 7 – Prosecution and Progress
1. DELETE Section 7.2d in its entirety and replace with the following:
“d. Insurance Requirements
1. Obligation of Contractor
The Contractor shall not commence any work until it obtains, at its own expense, all required insurance. Such insurance must have the approval of the Department as to limit, form and amount and must be maintained with a company authorized by law to issue such insurance in the State of Hawaii.
All insurance described herein will be maintained by the Contractor for the full period of the contract and in no event will be terminated or otherwise allowed to lapse prior to written certification of final acceptance of the work by the Department.
Certificate(s) of Insurance acceptable to the Department shall be filed with the Engineer prior to commencement of the work. These certificates shall contain a provision that coverages afforded under the policies will not be canceled or changed until at least thirty days written notice has been given to the Engineer by registered mail. The insurance policies shall name the State of Hawaii, its officers and employees as an
SP-3 SpProvAmdSec HIePRO Aug2015.docx additional insured and such coverage shall be noted on the Certificate. Should any policy be canceled before final acceptance of the work by the Department, and the Contractor fails to immediately procure replacement insurance as specified, the Department, in addition to all other remedies it may have for such breach, reserves the right to procure such insurance and deduct the cost thereof from any money due to the Contractor.
Nothing contained in these insurance requirements is to be construed as limiting the extent of Contractor’s responsibility for payment of damages resulting from its operations under this contract, including the Contractor’s obligation to pay liquidated damages, nor shall it affect the Contractor’s separate and independent duty to defend, indemnify and hold the Department harmless pursuant to other provisions of this contract. In no instance will the Department’s exercise of an option to occupy and use completed portions of the work relieve the Contractor of its obligation to maintain the required insurance until the date of final acceptance of the work.
All insurance described herein shall cover the insured for all work to be performed under the contract, all work performed incidental thereto or directly or indirectly connected therewith, including traffic detour work or other work performed outside the work area, and all change order work.
The Contractor shall, from time to time, furnish the Engineer, when requested, satisfactory proof of coverage of each type of insurance required or a copy of the actual policies covering the work. Failure to comply with the Engineer’s request may result in suspension of the work, and shall be sufficient grounds to withhold future payments due the Contractor and to terminate the contract for Contractor’s default.
2. Types of Insurance
The Contractor shall purchase and maintain insurance described below which shall provide coverage against claims arising out of the Contractor’s operations under the contract, whether such operations be by the Contractor itself or by the subcontractor or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable.
(a) Worker’s Compensation. The Contractor and all subcontractors shall obtain full worker’s compensation insurance coverage for all persons whom they employ or may employ in carrying out the work under this contact. This insurance shall be in strict conformity with the requirements of the most current and applicable State of Hawaii Worker’s Compensation Insurance laws in effect on the date of the execution of this contract and as modified during the duration of the contract.
(b) Commercial General Liability Insurance and Automobile Insurance. Contractor’s commercial general liability insurance and automobile liability insurance shall both be obtained in a combined, single limit of not less than $1,000,000 per occurrence that shall include coverage for bodily injury, sickness, disease or death of any person, arising directly or indirectly out of, or in connection with, the performance of work under this contract.
The Contractor’s property damage liability insurance shall provide for a single combined limit of not less than $1,000,000 for all damages arising out of injury to
SP-4 SpProvAmdSec HIePRO Aug2015.docx or destruction of property of others including the Department’s, arising directly or indirectly out of or in connection with the performance of the work under this contract including explosion or collapse.
The Contractor shall either:
i. Require each of its subcontractors to procure and to maintain during the life of its subcontract, subcontractors’ comprehensive general liability, automobile liability and property damage liability insurance of the type and in the same amounts specified herein; or
ii. Insure the activities of its subcontractors in its own policy.
The Contractor will be permitted, in cooperation with insurers, to maintain a self insured retention for up to 25% of the per occurrence combined single limits of the commercial general liability and the automobile liability policies. The existence of the self insured retention must be noted on the certificate of insurance coverage submitted to the Department or else it will be understood that the insurer is providing first dollar coverage for all claims. For all claims within the self-insured retention amount, the rights, duties and obligations between the Contractor and the Department shall be identical to that between a liability insurer and the Department, as an additional insured, as if there was no self-insured retention.
(c) Builder’s Risk Insurance. Unless included in the Specifications of this project, the Contractor shall not be required to provide builder’s risk insurance. If required as noted in the Specifications, builder’s risk insurance shall be provided during the progress of work and until final acceptance by the Department upon completion of the contract. It shall be “All Risk” (including but not limited to earthquake, windstorm and flood damage) completed value insurance coverage on all completed work and work in progress to the full replacement value thereof. Such insurance shall include the Department as additional name insured. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for its approval all items deemed to be uninsurable. The policy may provide for a deductible in an amount of up to 25% of the amount insured by the policy. With respect to all losses up to any deductible amount, the relationship between the Contractor and the Department shall be that of insurer and additional insured as if no deductible existed”.
2. DELETE Section 7.16 in its entirety and replace with the following:
“RESPONSIBILITY FOR DAMAGE CLAIMS; INDEMNITY – The Contractor shall indemnify the State and the Department against all loss of or damage to the State’s or the Department’s existing property and facilities arising out of any act or omission committed in the performance of the work by the Contractor, any subcontractor or their employees and agents. Contractor shall defend, hold harmless and indemnify the Department and the State, their employees, officers and agents against all losses, claims, suits, liability and expense, including but not limited to attorneys’ fees, arising out of injury to or death of persons (including employees of the State and the Department, the Contractor or any subcontractor) or damage to property resulting from or in connection with performance of the work and not caused solely by the negligence of the State or the Department, their agents, officers and employees. The State or the Department may participate in the defense of any claim or suit without relieving the Contractor of any obligation hereunder. The purchase of liability insurance shall not relieve the Contractor of the obligations described herein.
SP-5 SpProvAmdSec HIePRO Aug2015.docx
The Contractor agrees that it will not attempt to hold the State and its Departments and Agencies and their officers, representatives, employees or agents, liable or responsible for any losses or damages to third parties from the action of the elements, the nature of the work to be done under these specifications or from any unforeseen obstructions, acts of God, vandalism, fires or encumbrances which may be encountered in the prosecution of the work.
The Contractor shall pay all just claims for materials, supplies, tools, labor and other just claims against the Contractor or any subcontractor in connection with this contract and the surety bond will not be released by final acceptance and payment by the Department unless all such claims are paid or released. The Department may, but is not obligated to, withhold or retain as much of the monies due or to become due the Contractor under this contract considered necessary by the Engineer to cover such just claims until satisfactory proof of payment or the establishment of a payment plan is presented.
The Contractor shall defend, indemnify and hold harmless the State and its Departments and Agencies and their officers, representatives, employees or agents from all suits, actions or claims of any character brought on account of any claims or amounts arising or recovered under the Worker’s Compensation Laws or any other law, by-law, ordinance, order or decree.
Section 8 – Measurement and Payment
1. DELETE Section 8.7a in its entirety and replace with the following: a. Tax Clearances from the State of Hawaii Department of Taxation and Internal Revenue Service, subject to section 103D-328, HRS, current within two months of issuance date indicating that all delinquent taxes levied or accrued under State Statutes against the contractor have been paid.
2. ADD Section 8.7d, Certificate of Compliance: d. A Certification from the Contractor affirming that the Contractor has, as applicable, remained in compliance with all laws as required by Section 103D-310, HRS, and Section 3-122-112, HAR. A contractor making a false affirmation shall be suspended and may be debarred pursuant to section 103D-702, HRS.
1. Certification of Compliance for Final Payment, State Procurement Office Form-22. Must be Signed Original.
3. ADD Section 8.7e, Hawaii Compliance Express: e. In lieu of submitting the tax clearances from Taxation and IRS, and SPO Form -22, the Contractor may choose to use the Hawaii Compliance Express as described on page SP-1 of this Special Provisions.
SP-6 SpProvAmdSec HIePRO Aug2015.docx TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Page(s)
DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 01019 - GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS ...... 1 - 4 SECTION 01090 - STANDARD REFERENCES ...... 1 - 7 SECTION 01300 - SUBMITTALS ...... 1 - 5 SECTION 01505 - MOBILIZATION AND DEMOBILIZATION ...... 1 - 1 SECTION 01530 - BARRICADES ...... 1 - 3 SECTION 01567 - POLLUTION CONTROL ...... 1 - 3
DIVISION 2 - SITE CONSTRUCTION
SECTION 02110 - SITE PREPARATION ...... 1 - 3 SECTION 02200 - EARTHWORK ...... 1 - 5 SECTION 02281 - SOIL TREATMENT FOR TERMITE CONTROL ...... 1 - 3
DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE
SECTION 03200 - CONCRETE REINFORCING ...... 1 - 3 SECTION 03300 - CAST - IN - PLACE CONCRETE ...... 1 - 12
DIVISION 4 - MASONRY
SECTION 04220 - CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY ...... 1 - 7
DIVISION 5 - METALS
SECTION 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS ...... 1 - 4
DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS
SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY ...... 1 - 6 SECTION 06200 - CARPENTRY AND RELATED WORK ...... 1 - 3 SECTION 06311 - PRESERVATIVE TREATED LUMBER ...... 1 - 5
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
SECTION 07130 - MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING ...... 1 - 3 SECTION 07410 - PREFORMED METAL STANDING SEAM ROOFING ...... 1 - 6 SECTION 07411 - PREFORMED METAL WALL PANEL ...... 1 - 4 SECTION 07600 - FLASHING AND SHEET METAL ...... 1 - 4 SECTION 07920 - SEALANTS ...... 1 - 6
Table of Contents Job No. D00CO68CD00CO68A S-1 Page(s)
DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS
SECTION 08110 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES ...... 1 - 8 SECTION 08330 - OVERHEAD COILING SERVICE DOORS ...... 1 - 4 SECTION 08500 - VINYL WINDOWS ...... 1 - 7 SECTION 08710 - FINISH HARDWARE ...... 1 - 10
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
SECTION 09250 - GYPSUM BOARD ...... 1 - 7 SECTION 09900 - PAINTING ...... 1 - 14
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
SECTION 10200 - METAL WALL LOUVERS ...... 1 - 3 SECTION 10140 - SIGNAGE ...... 1 - 3 SECTION 10526 - FIRE EXTINGUISHER AND CABINETS ...... 1 - 2
DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT (NOT USED)
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS (NOT USED)
DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION (NOT USED)
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS (NOT USED)
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL
SECTION 15400 - PLUMBING ...... 1 - 8
DIVISION 16 ELECTRICAL
SECTION 16010 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS ...... 1 - 10
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
Table of Contents Job No. D00CO68CD00CO68A S-2
DIVISION 1- GENERAL REQUIRMENTS
SECTION 01019 – GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Work shall consist of furnishing all labor, tools, materials and equipment necessary and required to construct in place complete all work as indicated on the drawings and as specified herein.
1.02 GENERAL
A. Examination of Premises: The Contractor shall contact the Engineer and obtain permission before visiting the site.
B. All lines and grades shall be established by a licensed surveyor, or licensed Civil Engineer, registered in the State of Hawaii. The Contractor shall submit evidence of current and valid registration.
C. Notices: The Contractor shall notify the Engineer and provide at least a 3 working day notice before starting any work.
D. Disruption of Utility Services: All work related to the temporary disconnection of electrical system shall be pre-arranged with the Engineer so that any disruption of such services will be kept to a minimum. In the event temporary power hook- up is required, the Contractor shall provide the necessary services.
E. Contractor’s Operations:
1. The Contractor must employ, insofar as possible, such methods and means of carrying out the work so as not to cause any interruption or interference to the facility’s operations. Where the Contractor’s operations would result in interruptions which would hamper the operations of the facilities, the Contractor shall rearrange the schedule of work accordingly.
2. The Contractor shall maintain safe passageway to and from the facility for the user agency personnel and the public at all times.
3. Livestock may be present within the project site. The Contractor shall be held responsible for all livestock lost, injured or killed by him or as a result of his negligence.
4. The Contractor shall secure the exiting entrance gate to the project site at all times for safety and security purposes. The Contractor shall not hold the State responsible for any damage to or loss of existing property or construction equipment due to an unsecure site.
F. Lead Paint: When the project includes paint to be disturbed that was applied
General Specifications 01019-1 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
prior to 1980, it shall be assumed to contain lead. The Contractor shall inform its employees, subcontractors, and all other persons engaged in the project that lead containing paints are present in the existing building at the job site and to follow the requirements of the Department of Labor and Industrial Relations, Division of Occupational Safety and Health, Title 12, Subtitle 8, Chapter 148, Lead Exposure in Construction, Hawaii administrative Rules (Chapter 12-148, HAR).
G. Parking Policy for Contractor:
1. The Contract and its employees will not be allowed to park in zones assigned to facility personnel.
2. Areas to be used by the Contractor shall be as designated by the Engineer. Any lawn damaged by the Contractor shall be restores as instructed by the Engineer at no cost to the State.
H. Toilet Accommodations: The Contractor may use the existing toilet facilities if so designated by the Engineer; however, it is the Contractor’s responsibility to keep same clean and in sanitary condition at all times.
I. Protection of Property: The Contractor shall continually maintain adequate protection of all its work from damage and shall protect all property, including but not limited to buildings, equipment, furniture, grounds, vegetation, material, utility systems located at and adjoining the job site. The Contractor shall repair, replace or pay the expense of repair of damages resulting from its operations.
J. Use of Power Driven Equipment: The Contractor is cautioned to take all necessary safety precautions to protect the facility personnel, and the public whenever power driven equipment is used.
K. Safety: The Contractor shall carefully read and strictly comply with the requirements of the Hawaii Occupational Safety and Health Law, Chapter 396, Hawaii Revised Statures, as amended, is applicable and made a part of the Contract.
L. Clean Up Premises: The Contractor shall clean up and remove from premises all debris accumulated from operations as necessary or as directed. See also Section 7.25 of the General Conditions.
M. Responsibility:
1. The State will hold the Contractor liable for all the acts of Subcontractors and shall deal only with the prime Contractor in matters pertaining to other trades employed on the job. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating the work of all trades on the job.
2. Should the Contractor discover any discrepancy in the plans or specifications, the Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer before proceeding any further with the work, otherwise, the Contractor will be held
General Specifications 01019-2 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
responsible for any cost involved in correction of work placed due to such discrepancy.
N. Cooperation with Other Contractors: The State reserves the right at any time to contract for or otherwise perform other or additional work within the contract zone limes of this Contract. The Contractor of this project shall, to the extent ordered by the State, conduct its work so as not to interfere with or hinder the progress or completion of the work performed by other Contractors.
O. Division of the Work: The Divisions and Sections into which these Specifications are divided shall not be considered an accurate or complete segregation of work by trades. This also applies to all work specified within each Section
P. Drawings and Specifications:
1. The Contractor shall not make alterations in the drawings and specifications. In the event the Contractor discovers any errors or discrepancies, the Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer in accordance with the General Conditions
2. Where devices, or items, or parts thereof are referred to in the singular, it is intended that such references shall apply to as many devices, items or parts as are required to properly complete the work.
3. Specifications and drawings are prepared in abbreviated form and include incomplete sentences. Omission of words or phrases such as "the Contractor shall", "as shown on the drawings", "a", "an", and "the" are intentional. Omitted words and phrases shall be provided by inference to form complete sentences.
Q. Required Submittals:
1. Required submittals as specified in the Technical Sections of these specifications include one or more of the following: Shop drawings; color samples; material samples; schedules of operations; guarantees; operating and maintenance manuals; and as-built drawings.
2. The Contractor shall make a comprehensive list of the required submittals, by Specification Section, and submit this lit to the engineer within 15 days after Notice to Proceed.
3. As-Built Drawings: when as-built drawings are required for submittal, the following shall apply:
a. As-built drawings, the intent of which is to record the actual in-place construction so that any future renovations or tie-ins can be anticipated accurately, shall be required.
b. All deviation from alignments, elevations and dimensions which are stipulated on the plans shall be recorded in red on the as-built
General Specifications 01019-3 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
drawings.
c. The following procedures shall be followed:
(1) Immediately after these changes are constructed in place, the Contractor shall record them on the field office plans.
(2) Within two weeks after final inspection of the project, the Contractor shall transfer the changes marked on the field office plans onto a clean copy of plans using a red pencil. Any deletions shall be so noted and redrawn as necessary. The Contractor shall stamp or mark the tracings "AS_BUILT", and also sign and date each drawing so marked.
(3) The Contractor shall submit the as-built drawings to the Engineer for review and approval. After the Engineer approves the as-built drawings, the Contractor shall submit an electronic copy in Adobe PDF format on CD ROM.
(4) Any as-built drawing which the Engineer determines does not accurately record the deviation shall be corrected by the State, and the Contractor shall be charged for the services.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
NOT USED
PART 3 – EXECUTION
NOT USED
END OF SECTION
General Specifications 01019-4 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
SECTION 01090 - STANDARD REFERENCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Wherever used in the project, the following abbreviations will have the meanings listed:
Abbreviation Company
AA Aluminum Association Incorporated 818 Connecticut Avenue, N.W. Washington, D.C. 20006
AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials 444 North Capitol Street, N.W., Suite 225 Washington, D.C. 20001
ACI American Concrete Institute P.O. Box 19150 Detroit, MI
AEIC Association of Edison Illuminating Companies 51 East 42nd Street New York, NY 10017
AFBMA Anti-Friction Bearing Manufacturer's Association 60 East 42nd Street New York, NY 10017
AGA American Gas Association 8501 East Pleasant Valley Road Cleveland, OH 44131
AGMA American Gear Manufacturer's Association 1330 Massachusetts Avenue, N.W. Washington, D.C.
AISC American Institute of Steel Construction 101 Park Avenue New York, NY 10017
AISI American Iron and Steel Institute 1000 16th Street, N.W. Washington, D.C. 20036
AITC American Institute of Timber Construction 333 West Hampden Avenue Englewood, CO 80110
Standard References 01090-1 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
AMCA Air Moving and Conditioning Association, Inc. 30 West University Drive Arlington Heights, IL 60004
ANSI American National Standards Institute, Inc. 1430 Broadway New York, NY 10018
APA American Plywood Association 1119 A Street Tacoma, WA 98401
API American Petroleum Institute 1801 K Street N.W. Washington, DC 20006
ARI Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute 1814 North Fort Myer Drive Arlington, VA 22209
ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers 345 East 47th Street New York, NY 10017
ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange United States of America Standards Institute 1430 Broadway New York, NY 10018
ASE Code American Standard Safety Code for Elevators, Dumbwaiter and Escalators
ANSI American National Standards Institute 1430 Broadway New York, NY 10018
ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers United Engineering Center 345 East 47th Street New York, NY 10017
ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers 345 East 47th Street New York, NY 10017
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials 1916 Race Street Philadelphia, PA 19103
Standard References 01090-2 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
AWPA American Wood Preservers Association 1625 Eye Street Washington, DC 20006
AWS American Welding Society 2501 N.W. 7th Street Miami, FL 33125
AWWA American Water Works Association 6666 West Quincy Avenue Denver, CO 80235
CBM Certified Ballast Manufacturers 2120 Keith Building Cleveland, OH 44115
CMAA Crane Manufacturers Association of America, Inc. (Formerly called: Overhead Electrical Crane Institute - OECI) 1326 Freeport Road Pittsburgh, PA 15238
CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute 180 North La Salle Street Chicago, IL 60601
CSA Canadian Standards Association 178 Rexdale Boulevard Rexdale, Ontario, M9W IR3, Canada
DEMA Diesel Engine Manufacturer's Association 122 East 42nd Street New York, NY 10017
DIS Division of Industrial Safety California Department of Industrial Relations 2422 Arden Way Sacramento, CA 95825
EEI Edison Electric Institute 90 Park Avenue New York, NY 10016
EIA Electronic Industries Association 2001 Eye Street N.W. Washington, DC 20006
EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturer's Association 331 Madison Avenue New York, NY 10017
Standard References 01090-3 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
ESO Electrical Safety Orders, California Administrative Code, Title 8, Chap. 4, Subarticle 5 Office of Procurement, Publications Section P.O. Box 20191 8141 Elder Creek Road Sacramento, CA 95820
FEDSPEC Federal Specifications General Services Administration Specification and Consumer Information Distribution Branch Washington Navy Yard, Bldg. 197 Washington, DC 20407
FEDSTDS Federal Standards (see FEDSPECS)
FM Factory Mutual Research 1151 Boston-Providence Turnpike Norwood, MA 02062
HEI Heat Exchange Institute 122 East 42nd Street New York, NY 10017
HI Hydraulic Institute 1230 Keith Building Cleveland, OH 44115
IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials 5032 Alhambra Avenue Los Angeles, CA 90032
ICC International Code Council 5360 South Workman Mill Road Whittier, CA 90601
ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association P.O. Box South Yarmouth, MA 02664
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. 345 East 47th Street New York, NY 10017
IES Illuminating Engineering Society C/O United Engineering Center 345 East 47th Street New York, NY 10017
Standard References 01090-4 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
ISA Instrument Society of America 400 Stanwix Street Pittsburgh, PA 15222
JIC Joint Industrial Council 7901 Westpark Drive McLean, VA 22101
MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc. 127 Park Street, N.E. Vienna, VA 22180
NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers 100 South Marion Street Oak Park, IL 60302
NACE National Association of Corrosion Engineers P.O. Box 986 Katy, TX 77450
NEC National Electric Code
NFPA National Fire Protection Association 470 Atlantic Avenue Boston, MA 02210
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturer's Association 155 East 44th Street New York, NY 10017
NESC National Electric Safety Code American National Standards Institute 1430 Broadway New York, NY 10018
NFPA National Forest Products Association (Formerly called: National Lumber Manufacturer's Association) 1619 Massachusetts Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20036
OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Act U.S. Department of Labor San Francisco Regional Office 450 Golden Gate Avenue, Box 36017 San Francisco, CA 94102
PPIC The Plumbing & Piping Industry Council, Inc. 510 Shatto Place, Suite 402 Los Angeles, CA 90020
Standard References 01090-5 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
SAE Society of Automotive Engineers 2 Pennsylvania Street New York, NY 10001
SAMA Scientific Apparatus Makers Association One Thomas Circle Washington, DC 20005
SBCC Southern Building Code Congress 1116 Brown-Marx Building Birmingham, AL 35203
SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. 8224 Old Courthouse Road Tysons Corner Vienna, VA 22180
SSPWC Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction Building News, Inc. 3055 Overland Avenue Los Angeles, CA 90034
TEMA Tubular Exchanger Manufacturer's Association 331 Madison Avenue New York, NY 10017
UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. 207 East Ohio Street Chicago, IL 60611
UPC Uniform Plumbing Code Published by IAPMO
USBR Bureau of Reclamation U.S. Department of Interior Engineering and Research Center Denver Federal Center, Building 67 Denver, CO 80225
WWPA Western Wood Products Association (Formerly called: West Coast Lumberman's Association - WCLA) Yeon Building Portland, CA 97204
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
NOT USED
Standard References 01090-6 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
PART 3 - EXECUTION
NOT USED
END OF SECTION
Standard References 01090-7 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
SECTION 01300 - SUBMITTALS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
As specified in SECTION 01019 - GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Three Week Schedule: Submit a 3 week look ahead work schedule which shall be updated every week.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings.
C. Descriptive Sheets: Submit Product Cut Sheets, Catalogs, Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS), etc., which describe the product, material or equipment.
D. Material Samples and Color Samples: Submit Material Samples and Color Samples.
E. Field Record Drawings "As-Built": Submit Field Record Drawings "As-Built".
F. Refer to all sections under DIVISION 2 - SITE CONSTRUCTION through DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL for additional submittal requirements.
1.03 PROCEDURES
A. The Contractor is responsible for the coordination of all contractual work and submittals.
B. The Contractor shall have a rubber stamp made up in the following format:
CONTRACTOR NAME
PROJECT:
JOB NO:
THIS SUBMITTAL HAS BEEN CHECKED BY THIS GENERAL CONTRACTOR. IT IS CERTIFIED CORRECT, COMPLETE, AND IN COMPLIANCE WITH CONTRACT DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS. ALL AFFECTED CONTRACTORS AND SUPPLIERS ARE AWARE OF, AND WILL INTEGRATE THIS SUBMITTAL INTO THEIR OWN WORK.
DATE RECEIVED
SPECIFICATION SECTION
Submittals 01300-1 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
SPECIFICATION PARAGRAPH
SUBCONTRATOR NAME
SUPPLIER NAME
MANUFACTURER NAME
CERTIFIED BY:
C. This stamp, "filled in", should appear on the title sheet of each shop drawing, on a cover sheet of submittals in an 8-1/2 inch x 11 inch format, or on one face of a cardstock tag (min. 3 inch x 6 inch) tied to each sample. The tag on the samples should state what the sample is so that, if the tag is accidentally separated from the sample, it can be matched up again. The back of this tag will be used by the Engineer for his receipt, review, and log stamp and for any comments that relate to the sample.
D. All submittals for material, equipment, and shop drawings listed in the contract documents, including dimensioned shop drawings, shall be required and shall be reviewed by the Engineer, prior to any order of materials and equipment.
E. Unless otherwise noted, submittals shall consist of a minimum of 8 copies to the Engineer. Drawings shall be submitted in sufficient time to allow the Engineer not less than twenty regular working days for review.
F. The review of such drawings and catalog cuts by the Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for correctness of the dimensions, fabrication details, and space requirements or for deviations from the contract drawings and specifications, unless the Contractor has called attention to such deviations, in writing, by a letter accompanying the drawings and the Engineer approved the change or deviations, in writing, at the time of submission; nor shall review by the Engineer relieve the Contractor from the responsibility for errors in the shop drawings. When the Contractor does call such deviations to the attention of the Engineer, he shall state in his letter whether or not such deviations involve any deduction or extra cost adjustment.
G. The approval of the above drawings, lists, prints, specifications, or other data shall in no way release the Contractor from his responsibility for the proper fulfillment of the requirements of this contract nor for fulfilling the purpose of the installation nor from his liability to replace the same should it prove defective or fail to meet the specified requirements.
H. With the exception of sections with long lead time items, submit all submittal items required for each specification section concurrently.
I. Comply with the General Conditions in making submittals. Coordinate submittals of related work.
Submittals 01300-2 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
J. The Contractor shall make all submittals within 30 calendar days of the Notice to Proceed.
1.04 THREE WEEK SCHEDULE
A. Submit a 3 week look ahead work schedule indicating areas, floors, and rooms to be work on and the various trades or type of work to be undertaken daily. The 3 week look ahead work schedule shall be updated every week.
B. The General Contractor shall be responsible to notify the Engineer at least one week prior to required Special Inspections. The inspections shall also be noted on the 3 week look ahead work schedule.
C. Any and all disruptions of State access, etc. shall be coordinated in writing with the Engineer and obtain pre-approval from the Engineer. Disruptions shall be identified in the 3 week look ahead work schedule prior to any work.
1.05 SHOP DRAWINGS AND DESCRIPTIVE SHEETS
A. All submittals shall be made in accordance with the General Conditions unless otherwise specified. Drawings shall be presented in a clear and thorough manner. Drawing shall be accurate, distinct, and complete and shall contain all required information, including satisfactory identification of items, units and assemblies in relation to the contract drawings and specifications. Drawings shall be identified by reference to sheet, schedule, and detail shown on Contract Drawings.
B. Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, shop drawings shall be submitted only by the Contractor, who shall indicate by a signed stamp on the drawings or other approved means that the Contractor has checked the shop drawings and that the work or equipment shown is in accordance with contract requirements and has been checked for dimensions and relationship with work of all other trades involved. All deviations from the plans and specifications shall be listed. The practice of submitting incomplete or unchecked shop drawings for the Engineer to correct or finish will not be acceptable, and shop drawings which, in the opinion of the Engineer, clearly indicate that they have not been checked by the Contractor will be considered as not complying with the intent of the contract documents and will be returned to the Contractor for resubmission in the proper form.
C. When the shop drawings have been reviewed by the Engineer, two sets of submittals will be returned to the Contractor appropriately stamped. If major changes or corrections are necessary, the drawing may be rejected and one set will be returned to the Contractor with such changes or corrections indicated, and the Contractor shall correct and resubmit eight copies of the drawings, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. No changes shall be made by the Contractor to the resubmitted shop drawings other than those changes indicated by the Engineer. The resubmittal shall be so indicated on the shop drawing.
D. Mark each copy to identify applicable product, models and other data.
Submittals 01300-3 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
Supplement manufacturers’’ standard data to provide information unique to the work. Include manufacturers’’ installation instructions when required by the specification.
F. Materials Safety Data Sheets (MSDS): Submit MSDS for all materials. See SECTION 01010 - SUMMARY OF WORK, item entitled "SAFETY", for additional requirements for submission and maintenance of MSDS documents for all chemical products to be used at the Project Site.
1.06 MATERIAL SAMPLES AND COLOR SAMPLES
Submit full range of manufacturers’ standard textures, colors, and patterns for the Engineer. Submit samples as specified in the respective Specifications sections and as noted above. Samples shall illustrated functional characteristics of the Product, with integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate submittal of different categories for interfacing work. Include identification on each sample, giving full information.
1.07 FIELD RECORD DRAWINGS "AS BUILT"
A. The Contractor shall have Field Record Drawings at the site at all times. The Contractor shall keep current a complete set of full size contract drawings which will serve as Field Record Drawings showing as applicable to every architectural, structural, plumbing, fire protection, mechanical, and electrical, charge from the original Contract Documents, including all amendments, post contract documents (PCD), Change Orders, job decisions, revised information from toning operations, etc. The intent of Field Record Drawings is to record the actual in- place construction so that any future renovations or tie-ins can be anticipated accurately.
B. All deviations, changes, invert, location, etc., from alignment, elevations and dimensions which are stipulated on the Drawings and Shop Drawings, Specifications, amendments, post contract documents (PCD), Change Orders, job decisions, etc. during construction of the work shall be recorded on the Field Record Drawings before subsequent work conceals the applicable item.
C. The following procedure shall be followed:
1. Immediately after these changes are constructed in place or changed conditions are found, the Contractor shall record them on the Field Record Drawings. This to assure that changes are recorded before they are forgotten or concealed.
2. Field Record Drawings shall also record the location of all concealed water and electric services, water piping, sewers, wastes, vents, ducts, conduit and other piping; by indication of measured dimensions to each such line from readily identifiable and accessible walls, columns, partitions, or corner of the buildings.
3. The Contractor shall check all the changes and stamp or mark the Field
Submittals 01300-4 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
Record Drawings, "AS-BUILT", and also sign and date each drawing so marked.
4. The Contractor shall submit an accurate, clearly legible copy of the Field Record Drawings, "AS-BUILT", to the State after the punch list corrections have been accepted.
5. Any Field Record Drawings, "AS-BUILT", which the State determines does not accurately record the deviation shall be corrected by the Contractor.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION
NOT USED
END OF SECTION
Submittals 01300-5 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
SECTION 01505 - MOBILIZATION AND DEMOBILIZATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
As specified in SECTION 01019 - GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS.
1.02 MOBILIZATION
Mobilization shall consist of the transporting, assembling, constructing, installing, and making ready for use at the job site, all the equipment, machinery, structures, utilities, materials, labor, and incidentals necessary to do the work covered by this contract.
1.03 DEMOBILIZATION
Demobilization shall consist of the dismantling and removal of the above mentioned equipment, machinery, structures, utilities, materials, and incidentals, and the cleaning up of the site.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GUIDELINES
A. If the Contractor utilizes private lands other than the sites provided by the Project for mobilization purposes, the provisions of this section shall apply, and the mobilization and demobilization work on said private lands shall be in accordance with the agreement between the Contractor and the land owner.
B. Any and all additional mobilization or demobilization costs in excess of the maximum amounts specified in the Proposal shall be included in the appropriate unit prices bid in the Proposal. The Contractor shall not receive any compensation for mobilization and demobilization in addition to those specified in the Proposal.
C. All equipment, machinery, buildings, utilities and incidentals mobilized and demobilized under this section shall remain the property of the Contractor.
END OF SECTION
Mobilization and Demobilization 01505-1 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
SECTION 01530 - BARRICADES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. This work shall consist of furnishing, installing and maintaining barricades in accordance with the requirements of the contract.
B. Barricade application shall be provided for in the latest edition of the FHWA publication, Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways (MUTCD), and as amended.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Lumber: Lumber for rails, frames and braces shall be dry, sound, undamaged, well seasoned and free from any defect which may impair their strength and durability.
B. Hardware: Nails shall be galvanized wire nails. As many and as large a size as is practicable shall be used.
C. Paints: Paints shall be exterior enamel paint of the best grade or first line as made by approved manufacturers.
D. Sheet Reflecting Material: Sheet reflecting material shall conform to the applicable requirements of Subsection 712.20(C) of the "Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction".
E. Alternate Designs: Alternate barricade designs such as plastic molded barricades may be used subject to the Engineer's approval. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings or catalog cuts for approval.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Barricades shall be constructed in a first class, workmanlike manner in accordance with details shown on the plans and as specified herein. Barricades shall be in good condition and approved by the Engineer for use within the project limits.
1. Barricade application and installation shall be as shown on the plans and as directed by the Engineer in accordance with the guidelines provided in the latest edition of the FHWA publication, Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways (MUTCD), and any amendments or revisions thereof as may be made from time to time.
Barricades 01530-1 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
2. Sand bags or other approved weights shall be provided where required or as directed by the Engineer. Sand bags or other approved weights shall not be placed on any striped barricade rail.
3. Steady burn and/or flashing lamps shall be required on selected barricades used during hours of darkness. Locations shall be as shown on the plans and as directed by the Engineer. Lamps shall be attached on the barricade ends closest to the traveled way and shall be visible to the motorist.
4. Barricades furnished and paid for as provided for as provided herein may be used for temporary detours, construction phasing, or other temporary traffic control work.
5. Barricades furnished and paid for use in temporary detours or construction phasing may be used for permanent location called for on the plans.
6. Upon completion of the construction work, barricades shall be left in place, relocated, or removed and disposed of as shown on the plans or as directed by the Engineer. Barricades left in place, or relocated to new permanent locations shall become the property of the State. Barricades directed to be removed and disposed of shall become the property of the Contractor.
B. Painting: Wooden rails, frames and braces shall be given a prime coat and 2 finish coats of new white exterior enamel paint. Rail faces to be reflectorized may be left unpainted unless otherwise specified or directed.
C. Reflectorization: Reflectorization of barricade rails shall be done in a first class, workmanlike manner and the attachment of reflective sheeting shall be as shown on the plans, specified herein, or as directed and approved by the Engineer. Both vertical faces of each barricade rail shall be reflectorized as shown on the plans. Wooden rails shall be reflectorized with one of the following:
1. Reflective sheeting specified in Subsection 712.20(C)(4) of the "Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction" and backed with a 26 gage galvanized steel sheet, or
2. Hardened aluminum backed reflective sheeting as specified in Subsection 712.20(C)(5) of the "Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction."
D. Color: Rails, frames and braces shall be white. The front and back faces of barricade rails shall have 6-inch wide alternative colored and white striped sloping downward toward the traveled way at an angle of 45 degrees with the vertical. The colored stripes shall be either orange or red in accordance with the following requirements:
1. Orange and white stripes shall be used in the following conditions:
a. Construction work.
Barricades 01530-2 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
b Detours.
c. Maintenance work.
2. Red and white stripes shall be used in the following conditions:
a. On roadways with no outlet (ie. dead-ends, cul-de-sacs).
b. Ramps or lanes closed for operational purposes.
c. Permanent or semi-permanent closure or termination of a roadway.
E. Maintenance: Barricades shall be kept in good condition throughout their usage during construction until the end of the contract.
F. The Contractor shall repair, repaint, clean or replace the barricades as required and as directed by the Engineer to maintain their effectiveness and appearance.
G. The Constructor shall immediately replace all lost, stolen or damaged barricades, lamps, sand bags and other approved weights.
H. Barricades used during construction phasing, temporary detours or other temporary traffic control work shall be cleaned and repaired as necessary, prior to being relocated to a permanent location shown on the plans or as directed.
I. No extra payment will be made for any repair work, repainting, or cleaning of barricades. The Engineer shall determine the suitable condition of each barricade and shall determine when each barricade shall be repaired, repainted or cleaned.
END OF SECTION
Barricades 01530-3 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
SECTION 01567 - POLLUTION CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Rubbish Disposal:
1. No burning of debris and/or waste materials shall be permitted on the project site.
2. No burying of debris and/or waste material except for materials which are specifically indicated elsewhere in these specifications as suitable for backfill shall be permitted on the project site.
3. All unusable debris and waste material shall be hauled away to an appropriate off site dump area. During loading operations, debris and waste materials shall be watered down to allay dust.
4. No dry sweeping shall be permitted in cleaning rubbish and fines which can become airborne from floors or other paved areas. Vacuuming, wet mopping or wet or damp sweeping is permissible.
5. Enclosed chutes and/or containers shall be used for conveying debris from above to ground floor level.
6. Clean up shall include the collection of all waste paper and wrapping materials, cans, bottles, construction waste materials and other objectionable materials, and removal as required. Frequency of clean up shall coincide with rubbish producing events.
B. Dust:
1. The Contractor shall prevent dust from becoming airborne at all times including non-working hours, weekends and holidays in conformance with the State Department of Health, Administrative Rules, Title 11, Chapter 60 Air Pollution Control.
2. The method of dust control and costs shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Methods of dust control shall include the use of water, chemicals or asphalt over surfaces which may create airborne dust.
3. The Contractor shall be responsible for all damage claims in accordance with Section 7.16 "Responsibility for Damage Claims" of the GENERAL CONDITIONS.
C. Noise:
1. Noise shall be kept within acceptable levels at all times in conformance with the State Department of Health, Administrative Rules, Title 11, Chapter 46
Pollution Control 01567-1 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
Community Noise Control for Oahu. The Contractor shall obtain and pay for the Community Noise Permit from the State Department of Health when the construction equipment or other devices emit noise at levels exceeding the allowable limits.
2. All internal combustion engine powered equipment shall have mufflers to minimize noise and shall be properly maintained to reduce noise to acceptable levels.
3. Pile driving operations shall be confined to the period between 9:00 a.m. and 5:30 p.m., Monday through Friday. Pile driving will not be permitted on weekends and legal State and Federal holidays.
4. Starting up of construction equipment meeting allowable noise limits shall not be done prior to 6:45 a.m. without prior approval of the Engineer. Equipment exceeding allowable noise levels shall not be started up prior to 7:00 a.m.
D. Erosion:
1. During interim grading operations, the grade shall be maintained so as to preclude any damage to adjoining property from water and eroding soil.
2. Temporary berms, cut off ditches and other provisions which may be required because of the Contractor's method of operations shall be installed at no cost to the State.
3. Drainage outlets and silting basing shall be constructed and maintained as shown on the plans to minimize erosion and pollution of waterways during construction.
E. Others:
1. Wherever trucks and/or vehicles leave the site and enter surrounding paved streets, the Contractor shall prevent any material from being carried onto the pavement. Waste water shall not be discharged into existing streams, waterways, or drainage systems such as gutters and catch basins unless treated to comply with the State Department of Health water pollution regulations.
2. Trucks hauling debris shall be covered as required by PUC Regulation. Trucks hauling fine materials shall be covered.
3. No dumping of waste concrete will be permitted at the job site.
4. Except for rinsing of the hopper and delivery chute, and for wheel washing where required, concrete trucks shall not be cleaned on the job site.
5. Except in an emergency, such as a mechanical breakdown, all vehicle fueling and maintenance shall be done in a designated area. A temporary
Pollution Control 01567-2 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
berm shall be constructed around the area when runoff can cause a problem.
6. When spray painting is allowed such spray painting shall be done by the "airless spray" process. Other types of spray painting will not be allowed.
F. Suspension of Work:
1. Violations of any of the above requirements or any other pollution control requirements which may be specified in the Technical Specifications herein shall be cause for suspension of the work creating such violation. No additional compensation shall be due the Contractor for remedial measures to correct the offense. Also, no extension of time will be granted for delays caused by such suspensions.
2. If no corrective action is taken by the Contractor within 72 hours after a suspension is ordered by the Engineer, the State reserves the right to take whatever action is necessary to correct the situation and to deduct all costs incurred by the State in taking such action from monies due the Contractor.
3. The Engineer may also suspend any operations which he feels are creating pollution problems although they may not be in violation of the above mentioned requirements. In this instance, the work shall be done by force account as described in Subsection 4.2b "Additional Work" of the GENERAL CONDITIONS and paid for in accordance with Subsection 8.4b "Force Account Work" therein. The count of elapsed working days to be charged against the contract in this situation shall be computed in accordance with Subsection 7.18 "Contract Time" of the GENERAL CONDITIONS.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION
NOT USED
END OF SECTION
Pollution Control 01567-3 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C Job No. D00CO68C
DIVISION 2 - SITE CONSTRUCTION
SECTION 02110 - SITE PREPARATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
As specified in SECTION 01019 - GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. The work to be performed under this section shall include clearing the premises of all obstacles and obstructions, the removal of which will be necessary for the proper reception, construction, execution and completion of the other work included in this contract.
B. Protect adjacent walls and fence from damage during construction operations.
C. Provide dust fence at adjacent property lines and silt fence.
1.03 EXISTING SERVICES
A. General: Indicated locations are approximate; determine exact locations before commencing work.
B. Arrange and pay for disconnecting, removing, capping, and plugging utility services. Notify affected utility companies in advance and obtain approval from Engineer before starting this Work.
C. Place markers to indicate location of disconnected services. Identify service lines and capped locations on Project Record Documents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Maintenance of Traffic: The Contractor shall conduct operations with minimum interference to streets, driveways, sidewalks, passageways, etc.
B. When necessary, the Contractor shall provide and erect barriers, etc., with special attention to protection of personnel.
C. Do not redistribute excess soil on site unless specifically indicated and approved
Site Preparation 02110-1 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
by Engineer.
D. Protection: Throughout the progress of the work protection shall be provided for all property and equipment, and temporary barricades shall be provided as necessary. Work shall be done in accordance with the safety provisions of the Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction, published by the Associated General Contractors of America, and the State of Hawaii's Occupational Safety and Health Standards, Rules and Regulations.
E. Fires: No burning of fires of any kind will be allowed.
F. Reference Points: Bench marks, etc., shall be carefully maintained, but if disturbed or destroyed, shall be replaced as directed, at the Contractor's expense.
G. Disposal: All materials resultant from operations under this Section shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the site. Loads of materials shall be trimmed to prevent droppings.
3.02 EXISTING UTILITY LINES
The existence of active underground utility lines within the construction area is not definitely known other than those indicated in their approximate locations on the Drawings. Should any unknown line be encountered during excavation, the Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer of such discovery. The Engineer shall then investigate and issue instructions for the preservation or disposition of the unknown line. Authorization for extra work shall be issued by the Engineer only as he deems necessary.
3.03 CLEARING AND GRUBBING
A. The Contractor shall clear the premises of all obstacles and obstructions, the removal of which will be necessary for the proper reception, construction, execution and completion of other work included in this contract.
B. After clearing has been completed, the entire site shall be stripped of the organically contaminated near surface soils to a minimum depth of 6 inches. Remove trees and roots to a minimum of 3 feet below existing ground level. Remove all large roots in excess of 2 inches in diameter, and backfill and compact the resulting depression. All debris accumulated from this operation shall be completely removed from the premises by the Contractor.
C. The Contractor shall protect from injury and damage all surrounding trees, plants, etc., and shall leave all in as good as condition as at present. Any damage to existing improvement shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
3.04 CLEAN UP OF PREMISES
Clean up and remove all debris accumulated from building operations from time
Site Preparation 02110-2 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
to time as directed. Upon completion of the construction work and before final acceptance of the contract work, remove all surplus materials, equipment, scaffoldings, etc., and leave entire job site raked clean and neat to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
END OF SECTION
Site Preparation 02110-3 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
SECTION 02200 - EARTHWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
As specified in SECTION 01019 - GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to examine the project site and determine for himself the existing conditions.
B. Obvious conditions of the site existing on the date of the bid opening shall be accepted as part of the work, even though they may not be clearly indicated on the drawings and/or described herein or may vary therefrom.
C. All debris of any kind accumulated from clearing shall be disposed of from the site, and the whole area left clean. The Contractor shall be required to make all necessary arrangements relative to the proposed place of disposal.
1.03 REMOVAL AND REPAIR WORK
The Contractor shall exercise every precaution to preserve and protect all structures, walkways or utility improvements which are to remain or be relocated. Portions of walkway and pavement which are to remain shall be saw cut neat and true to line. Restore all pavement and curbs upon completion of the work.
1.04 SEQUENCE OF WORK
All sequence of work shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
1.05 PROTECTION
A. Barricade: Erect temporary barricade to prevent people from entering into project area, to the extent as approved by the Engineer. Refer to SECTION 01530 - BARRICADES for barricade requirements. The extent of barricades may be adjusted as necessary with the approval of the Engineer. This work shall be accomplished at no extra cost to the State.
B. Take all precautions and safety measures as required to protect the State free and harmless from liability of any kind. Conduct operations with minimum interference to streets, driveways, sidewalks passages, etc.
C. Adequate precautions shall be taken before commencing and during the course of the work to ensure the protection of life, limb, and property.
D. The Contractor shall protect from damage all surrounding structures, trees, plants, grass, walks, pavements, etc. Any damage will be repaired or replaced by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Earthwork 02200-1 Job No. D00CO68C
1.05 PERMITS
The Contractor shall obtain and pay for necessary permits prior to the commencement of work.
1.06 MAINTAINING TRAFFIC
A. The Contractor shall conduct operations with minimum interference to streets, driveways, sidewalks, traffic activities, etc.
B. When necessary, the Contractor shall provide, erect and maintain lights, barriers, etc., as required by traffic and safety regulations with special attention to protection of life.
1.07 CONSTRUCTION LINES, LEVELS AND GRADES
A. The Contractor shall verify all lines, levels and elevations indicated on the drawings before any clearing, excavation or construction begins. Any discrepancy shall be immediately brought to the attention of the Engineer and any changes shall be made in accordance with his instructions. The Contractor shall not be entitled to extra payment if he fails to report the discrepancies before proceeding with any work whether within the area affected or not.
B. The laying out of base lines, establishment of grades and staking out the entire work shall be done by a licensed Surveyor or a licensed Civil Engineer, registered in the State of Hawaii. He or she shall be solely responsible for their accuracy. Erect and maintain substantial batter boards showing construction lines and levels.
1.08 CLEANUP
Clean up and remove all debris accumulated from construction operations from time to time, when as directed by the Engineer. Upon completion of the construction work and before final acceptance of work, remove all surplus materials, equipment, etc. and leave entire jobsite clean and neat.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Yard Fill: Fill materials shall be soil with expansion value not greater than 3 percent, free from debris, perishable or combustible materials, sod and stones larger than 6 inches in maximum dimension. Rock or broken masonry shall be well distributed in earth or other fine material with voids filled and shall be placed within three feet of finished grades.
B. Structural Fill: New structural fill below interior and exterior concrete slabs or paving, with allowance for depth of cushion fill, shall be select borrow material. This material shall be granular with an expansion value not greater than 3
Earthwork 02200-2 Job No. D00CO68C
percent non-adobe and with a plasticity index less than 10. Decayed rubbish, debris, or rocks greater than 3 inches in diameter shall not be allowed as fill material. Certificate of compliance shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to filling.
C. Topsoil: Imported, fertile, friable soil of loamy character having normal amounts of natural humus, free from subsoil, clay, refuse roots, weeds, noxious seeds, nematodes or other deleterious matter, and free from toxic amounts of either acid or alkaline elements and capable of sustaining healthy plant life. Stones and earth lumps shall not be greater than one inch in largest dimension. Red humic latosol soils, or types known as "Palolo clay" or Lualualei clay" are unacceptable. Topsoil is subject to approval by Engineer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXCAVATION
A. Protective Measures
1. All excavation shall be protected and guarded against danger to life, limb and property.
2. Shoring, cribbing and logging, as required to safely preserve the excavations and earth banks, free from damages resulting from the work shall be provided and installed by the Contractor.
3. All excavations shall be kept free from standing water. The Contractor shall do all pumping and draining that may be necessary to remove water to the extent required in carrying on the work. Grading shall be controlled so that the ground surface is properly sloped to prevent water run-off into structural foundations and open trenching excavations.
4. The underground utilities lines traversing the construction area known to exist by the designer are indicated on the plans. Should any be encountered during excavation, the Contractor shall not disconnect same without authorization from the Engineer but shall inform the latter immediately of each discovery. The Engineer shall investigate and issue proper authorization for procedure.
B. General
1. Excavation shall be done to the lines and grades indicated. Concrete slabs, concrete curbs, asphaltic concrete pavement, etc., not indicated to remain shall be removed or broken up into pieces of sizes permitted in other paragraphs of this section. When incorporated in fill, broken up pieces shall be well mixed with finer materials filling all spaces between the pieces.
Earthwork 02200-3 Job No. D00CO68C
2. Excavation for footings, foundation, etc., shall have level beds on unfilled, undisturbed, firm bearing, with stepped level where necessary. Small soft spots shall be compacted to unyielding firmness. If soil conditions are suitable and approved, footing cuts may be made to exact size of footing.
3. Structural excavations carried below specified level shall be filled with concrete to the proper level at the expense of the Contractor.
4. Excavated materials declared unusable by Engineer shall be removed from the site at the Contractor's expense.
3.02 BACKFILL
A. Yard Area
1. Yard fill where no concrete slab occurs shall be in 6 inches layers (compacted thickness) compacted to 90 percent of maximum density as determined by ASTM Test, Method D-1557.
2. The areas not covered by asphalt paving or concrete slab shall be graded to conform to finish contours, with allowance for depth of topsoil. Rough grading shall prevent the drainage of water into construction areas.
B. Structural Fill
1. In advance of preparing the subgrade or depositing a specified layer of material, existing material within the area where such materials is to be placed, which in the opinion of the Engineer is unsuitable as a subgrade foundation, shall be removed and the resulting space refilled with approved material and compacted.
2. Backfilling shall progress so that excessive unbalanced load is not introduced against any structure.
3. New structural fill material shall be placed in layers not to exceed 6 inches per compacted layer and compacted to a compaction of 90 percent as determined by ASTM Test, Method D-1557.
4. Materials and compaction of all yard and structural fill shall be tested by an independent testing agency approved by the Engineer and all after - compaction test results submitted to the Engineer for approval. All cost of testing shall be borne by the Contractor. Testing shall be made throughout the area for each 6 inches compacted layer as directed by the Engineer. All test results must be approved before proceeding with placing of topsoil, cushion fill or base course.
5. In the event insufficient amount of structural fill or yard fill is derived from earthwork operations, import the necessary materials without any additional cost to the State. Such imported material shall meet the requirements as specified for each category of materials.
Earthwork 02200-4 Job No. D00CO68C
6. The ground shall be scarified 6 inches below existing grade and recompacted to 90 percent compaction. Fill shall conform to structural fill.
7. Under interior and exterior slabs the cushion fill as specified shall be compacted to a level surface to 95 percent compaction as determined by modified ASTM Test Method, D-1557.
C. Grading
1. Rough Grading: The areas not covered by asphalt paving or concrete slab up to the contract zone limit shall be graded to topsoil. Contractor shall take the necessary precautions to prevent the drainage of water into construction area.
2. Finish Grading: Outdoor areas not covered by buildings shall be graded to finish grade and contours with allowance for a 4 inch layer of topsoil as required. Grading shall conform with the ordinances of the applicable County issuing the Grading Permit and as amended. Areas to be topsoiled to 85 percent of maximum density before placing topsoil. Topsoil shall be spread evenly, compacted lightly and raked to a uniform place at required contours and grades.
END OF SECTION
Earthwork 02200-5 Job No. D00CO68C
SECTION 02281 - SOIL TREATMENT FOR TERMITE CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
As specified in Section 01019 - GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS.
1.02 SUMMARY
Soil treatment for termite control consists of application of termiticide chemicals to exposed soil and to voids in construction where insects may gain entry to the building.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of SECTION 01300 - SUBMITTALS.
B. Manufacturer's Data: Submit to the Engineer for acceptance copies of the label for the chemical proposed for use.
C. Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS): Submit MSDS for all products and keep one posted at the project site.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Soil at new slab shall be treated against subterranean termites by a pest control operator licensed by the Hawaii State Pest Control Board in Branch #3 and certified as a commercial applicator under the Hawaii Pesticide Law by the Hawaii State Department of Agriculture in category 7b.
B. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer at least one day before application of chemicals.
C. A totalizing meter shall be provided to determine application rates and to indicate the total volume of pesticide applied in U.S. gallons. The meter shall be no more than 5-feet from the applicator at all times.
D. Pumping equipment shall be a type normally used and be capable of pumping the working solution in a manner accepted and practiced by the pest control industry.
E. Environmental Limitations: To ensure penetration, do not treat soil that is water saturated. Do not treat soil while precipitation is occurring. Comply with EPA Registered Label requirements and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
Soil Treatment for Termite Control 02881-1 Job No. D00CO68C
1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Deliver pesticides to the project site in sealed and labeled containers in good condition as supplied by the manufacturer or formulator. Store, handle, and use pesticides in accordance with manufacturer's labels. Labels shall bear evidence of registration under the Federal Insecticide, Fungicide, and Rodenticide Act (FIFRA), as amended.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Termiticide: Provide an EPA-registered termiticide complying with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, in a soluble or emulsible, concentrated formulation that dilutes with water or foaming agent, and formulated to prevent termite infestation. Use only soil treatment solutions that are not harmful to plants. Provide quantity required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum termiticide concentration allowed for each specific use, according to the product's EPA-Registered Label. The selected termiticide shall be suitable for the soil and climate conditions of the project site.
B. Chemicals shall be aqueous solutions of Type I repellent termiticides such as Prelude, Dragnet SFR, Demon TC, or Prevail FT or the Type II non-repellant termiticide Premise 75. The chemicals shall be used in accordance with all local laws, ICC IBC as amended, and the labels and provisions related to the use of those pesticides as adopted by the Hawaii Pesticide Law, Chapter 149A, HRS, and the Federal Insecticide, Fungicide and Rodenticide Act (FIFRA), as amended. Organophosphate termiticides such as Dursban TC (chlorpyrifos) shall not be used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 APPLICATION
A. The solution shall be applied uniformly and at the maximum rates permitted on the label for the chemical being used.
B. Treatment shall include the provision of vertical barriers as stated on the product label, including the creation of a vertical barrier around the slab's outer perimeter after the establishment of the final grade. Treatment shall extend down to the bottom of the footing.
C. Whenever possible, the solution shall be applied not more than 24 hours before the pouring of concrete over the affected area. The treated areas shall be completely covered by a moisture barrier in the event of rainfall following treatment but prior to the pouring of the concrete.
D. The solution under slabs shall be applied after backfill has been completed and
Soil Treatment for Termite Control 02881-2 Job No. D00CO68C
rough plumbing and other utility lines have been installed and just prior to the placement of the moisture barrier. Clear all cellulose debris, including wood scraps from areas beneath the structure. The treatment shall be applied to dry compacted material whenever possible, but in any case shall not be applied under conditions during which the soil does not readily absorb the solution.
E. Treat voids in masonry and similar construction.
F. Avoid disturbance of treated soil after application. Keep off treated areas until completely dry.
G. Protect termiticide solution, dispersed in treated soils and fills, from being diluted until ground-supported slabs are installed. Use waterproof barrier according to EPA-Registered Label instructions.
H. Post warning signs in areas of application. Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation, grading, landscaping, or other construction activities following application.
3.02 CLEAN UP
Do not allow chemicals to remain at the project site whenever the Contractor is not present at the site. Remove chemical spills and other applications exceeding label requirements as recommended by the manufacturer and as directed by the Engineer at no additional cost to the State.
END OF SECTION
Soil Treatment for Termite Control 02881-3 Job No. D00CO68C
SECTION 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL CONDITIONS
As specified in SECTION 01019 – GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS.
1.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
The work to be done under this section shall include performing all operations and furnishing all plant, labor, equipment, and materials for all concrete work indicated on the drawings and specified herein.
1.03 STORAGE OF MATERIALS
Cement and aggregates shall be stored in such a manner as to prevent their deterioration or the intrusion of foreign matter. Any material which has deteriorated or which has been damaged shall not be used for concrete and shall be promptly removed from the site.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS:
A. Portland cement shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C150,Type I, for all concrete work.
B. Concrete Aggregates:
1. Fine aggregates: Calcareous or basalt sands, or a combination thereof. They shall meet the grading requirements of ASTM C33. If manufactured sands are used, use a water-reducing and/or air-entraining admixture as specified hereinafter to provide satisfactory workability. The cement content of a mix shall in no way be reduced if an admixture is used.
2. Coarse aggregates: Crushed close-grained, blue lava rock of grading sizes 57 or 67 (ASTM D448) or both with a maximum size not larger than 1/5 of the narrowest dimensions between sides of the nor larger than 3/4 of the minimum clear spacing between individual reinforcing bars or bundle of bars.
C. Water: Fresh, clean and drinkable.
D. Reinforcing Steel: Deformed bars conforming to ASTM A 615/A615M, as shown on the drawings.
Cast-In-Place Concrete 03300-1 Job No. D00CO68C E. Expansion Joint Filler: A pre-molded material of 1/2" thickness, unless otherwise noted, composed of fiberboard impregnated with asphalt conforming to ASTM D 1751.
F. Welded wire fabric for concrete reinforcement shall conform to ASTM A185 and shall be galvanized.
G. Admixture: If used, shall conform to ASTM C494 or ASTM C260 and shall be mixed in proper amount in accordance with directions of manufacturer.
H. Curing Compound: Compatible with the floor finish to be applied. Unless otherwise required by the floor finish, the compound shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C309.
I. Moisture Barrier: Polyethylene film, minimum 0.006" thick.
J. "Key Kold Joint" shall be galvanized metal or PVC.
K. Formwork: Formwork shall be plywood commercial-standard Douglas Fir, moisture resistant, not less than 5-ply and at least 5/8” thick.
L. Epoxy Grout: Epoxy for grouting dowels into existing concrete shall be Simpson SET-XP or approved equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 DESIGN OF CONCRETE MIXES
A. Ingredients for concrete shall be Portland cement, fine and coarse aggregates, and water.
B. Design mix so that the concrete materials will not segregate nor cause excessive bleeding. Slump shall be 4 inches or less if consolidation is to be by vibration, and 5 inches or less if consolidation is to be by other methods. A tolerance of 1" above the indicated maximum will be allowed for individual batches.
Cast-In-Place Concrete 03300-2 Job No. D00CO68C C. Concrete cement content and the test results for 28-day compressive strength shall meet the following requirements:
28-Day Compressive Strength Test Results
Min. Cement Min. Average Min. Average Contents Per for 3 for 2 Cubic Yard Cylinders, Cylinders, Class Sacks __ ___ psi______psi____
4,000 6.25 4,000 3,750 3,000 5.50 3,000 2,750 2,500 5.00 2,500 2,250
D. The Contractor shall submit for approval by the Engineer the mixes he intends to use at least 14 days before the actual concrete placing operation. Concrete mix design water/ cement ratio shall not exceed 0.55.
E. The Contractor shall use only approved mixes.
3.02 TESTS
A. Testing company shall make one set of field sample which consists of three test cylinders and one slump test from each days pour or for each 50 cubic yards of concrete placed. Slump tests shall conform to ASTM C 143, and compressive strength tests shall conform to ASTM C 39. Cost of testing, will be borne by the Contractor.
B. If the strength of any test specimens fall below the requirements stipulated above, the Architect/Engineer shall have the right to require any and all defective concrete to be replaced, and all costs resulting therefrom shall be borne by the Contractor.
3.03 FORMWORK
A. Construct formwork so that the concrete surfaces do not deviate from established lines, grades and dimensions in excess of the following tolerances:
1. Variations from plumb:
In any 20 feet length 1/4 inch Maximum for entire length 1/2 inch
2. Variation from level or from the grades indicated:
In any 20 feet length 1/4 inch Maximum for entire length 1/2 inch
Cast-In-Place Concrete 03300-3 Job No. D00CO68C 3. Variation in the sizes and location of sleeves, floor openings, and wall openings: Plus or minus 1/4 inch
4. Where soil conditions will permit excavation to accurate sizes without bracing, side forms for footings may be omitted only if approved by the Engineer.
5. Rough concrete finish may be used for all unexposed concrete surfaces, as obtained by using clean, straight lumber of metal forms.
3.04 REINFORCEMENT
A. Provide reinforcing steel bars, as indicated on the drawings, thoroughly cleaned of loose mill scale, loose flaky rust, oil, and all coatings that will destroy or reduce the bond before placing and again before pouring of concrete. Accurately position and secure in place as indicated. Cleaning, bending and placing of reinforcement shall be done in accordance with standard practice of the Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute.
1. Unless permitted by the Engineer, do not bend reinforcement partially embedded in hardened concrete. Improperly and/or excessively bent bars shall be replaced.
2. Unless otherwise noted on drawings, provide minimum concrete protection for reinforcement as follows:
a. For footings and where concrete is deposited against the ground: 3 inches.
b. For formed surfaces in contact with ground: 2 inches
c. For formed surfaces exposed to weather: 1-1/2 inches
d. Minimum concrete protection for any reinforcing shall in all cases be at least equal to the diameter of bar.
3.05 INSERTS AND FASTENING DEVICES EMBEDDED IN CONCRETE
Install inserts, anchors, grounds and other fastening devices as required for attachments of the work. Properly locate all embedded items in cooperation with other trades and secure in position before concrete is placed.
3.06 JOINTS
A. Construction joints shall be provided as detailed at locations indicated on the plans. Construction joints not shown on the plans shall be so made as to least impair the strength of the structure and shall be approved by the Engineer. In general, they shall be located near the middle of the spans of slabs, beams and
Cast-In-Place Concrete 03300-4 Job No. D00CO68C girders unless a beam intersects a girder at this point, in which case the construction joints in the girders shall be offset a distance equal to twice the width of the beam. Joints in columns and walls shall be at the underside of floors, slabs, beams and girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs. Beams, girders, brackets, column capitals, haunches and drop panels shall be placed at the same time as slabs. Joints shall be perpendicular to the main reinforcement.
B. All reinforcing steel shall be continuous across construction joints. Keys and/or inclined dowels shall be provided as required. Longitudinal keys at least 1-1/2" deep shall be provided in all joints in walls and between walls and slabs or footings. Unless otherwise noted, joints shall be sealed with joint sealing compound.
C. Expansion joints shall be provided as detailed at locations indicated on the plans. Reinforcement or other embedded metal items bonded to the concrete (except dowels in floors or walls bonded on only one side of joint) shall not be permitted to extend continuously through any expansion joint. Joints shall be sealed with expansion joint filler and sealing compound at least 3/8 inch deep.
D. Contraction/control joints shall be provided where shown on the plans and shall be 1/4 the depth of the slab or a minimum of 1" deep. Unless otherwise indicated on the plans, joint may either be tooled, formed-in-place or sawcut. When saw-cut joints are provided, cutting shall be timed properly with the set of the concrete so that it is firm enough not to be torn or damaged by the cutting blade and before random shrinkage cracking can form in the slab. In any case, cutting shall be completed not later than 12 hours after the concrete is placed and finished. Unless otherwise indicated on the plans, joints shall be sealed with joint sealing compound.
3.07 MIXING CONCRETE
A. All concrete throughout shall be either job or plant mixture in an approved type of power operated mixer that will insure uniformity and homogeneity of the concrete produced. Contractor shall provide a sufficient number of mixers to continuously carry on the work.
B. Mixing at jobsite shall be allowed only for minor items such as curbs, stoops as approved by the engineer of record. Mixing at jobsite shall be done in accordance with ACI 304 and as follows:
1. Concrete shall be thoroughly mixed in a batch mixer of an approved type and size, which will insure a uniform distribution of materials throughout the mass. The machine shall have a control device to prevent materials from being discharged until they have been mixed for the specified minimum time.
2. The entire contents of the drum shall be discharged before materials of the succeeding batch are placed therein. No mixer shall be used which has a
Cast-In-Place Concrete 03300-5 Job No. D00CO68C rated capacity of less than a 1-sack batch and no mixer shall be charged in excess of its rated capacity.
3. The first batch of materials placed in the mixer after the machine has been cleaned shall contain a sufficient excess of cement, sand and water to coat the inside of the drum without reducing the required mortar content of the mix. Upon cessation of mixing, the mixer shall be thoroughly cleaned.
C. Ready-Mixed and Mixed-In-Transit Concrete shall be mixed to conform to the provisions of ASTM C94 and as follows:
1. The plant shall have sufficient capacity and transportation equipment to deliver concrete at the rate desired. The interval between batches for a pour shall not exceed 30 minutes.
2. The time elapsed between the introduction of the mixing water to the cement and aggregates or the cement to the aggregates, and the placing of concrete in its final position shall not exceed 90 minutes.
3. In hot weather (more than 90 degrees F. ambient temperature) or under conditions contributing to quick stiffening of the concrete, the elapsed time in paragraph 2. shall not exceed 60 minutes, if no retarding admixture is used. If an ASTM C494 Type B or D admixture is added to the concrete, the elapsed time 2. shall remain at 90 minutes.
D. Concrete shall be mixed only in such quantity as is required for immediate use. No retempering will be permitted and concrete that has started to harden shall be discarded and promptly removed from the job.
E. Admixture conforming to Paragraph 2.01 may be used in the concrete as recommended by supplier and approved by the Engineer.
F. Hand mixing of concrete will not be permitted except to make up shortages for fence post footings and sidewalks, thresholds, flagpole foundations, curbs and gutters, and thrust blocks.
3.08 PLACING CONCRETE
A. No concrete shall be placed in the absence of the Engineer or his representative who shall be given one day advance notice of starting time of concrete pour. Place no concrete until foundation, forms, steel, pipes, conduits, sleeves, hangers, anchors, inserts, termite treatment and other work required to be built into or placed ahead of concrete placing have been inspected and approved by the Engineer. Concrete placed without such notice and approval shall be rejected.
Cast-In-Place Concrete 03300-6 Job No. D00CO68C B. Preparation:
1. All sawdust, chips and other construction debris and extraneous matter shall be removed from interior of forms. Struts, stays, bracing, or blocks serving temporarily to hold forms in correct shape or alignment shall be removed when the concrete placing has reached an elevation rendering their service unnecessary.
2. Concrete shall be placed upon clean, damp surfaces with no free water, or upon properly compacted fills but never upon soft mud or dry, porous earth. Before pouring footing or foundations, bottoms of excavations shall be properly leveled off and tamped.
3. Before depositing new concrete on or against concrete which has set, all accumulations of mortar splashed upon reinforcing steel and the surfaces of forms shall be removed and the forms shall be retightened. The surfaces of previously set concrete shall be thoroughly roughened and cleaned of all foreign matter and laitance, saturated with water and slushed with a coat of cement grout. New concrete shall be placed before the grout has attained its initial set.
C. Conveying:
1. Concrete shall be conveyed from mixer to forms as rapidly as practicable by methods that will prevent segregation.
2. Concrete shall be deposited as nearly as practicable in its final position. Extensive spading as a means of transportation shall be avoided and in no case shall vibrators be used to transport concrete inside the forms.
3. Open troughs and chutes shall have a slope not to exceed 1 vertical to 2 horizontal and not less than 1 vertical to 3 horizontal. Chutes more than 20 feet long and chutes not meeting the slope requirements may be used provided they discharge into a hopper before distribution.
4. The concrete shall not be allowed to drop freely more than 6 feet except where specifically authorized by the Engineer. When placing operations would involve the dropping of concrete from a height of more than 6 feet, it shall be conveyed through pipes or flexible drop chutes.
5. If any appreciable segregation occurs through the conveying methods employed, their use shall be ordered discontinued by the Engineer and some other satisfactory method of placing concrete shall be used.
6. All chutes, troughs, pipes and other means of conveyances shall be kept clean and free from coatings of hardened cement or concrete by thoroughly cleaning with water and chipping after each pour. Water used for flushing
Cast-In-Place Concrete 03300-7 Job No. D00CO68C shall be discharged away from the vicinity of the concrete or forms already in place.
D. Depositing:
1. Unless adequate protection is provided, concrete shall not be placed during rain. Rainwater shall not be allowed to increase the mixing water nor to damage the surface finish. Fresh concrete that has been deposited but has not attained its initial set shall be protected in the event of rain.
2. Concrete shall be placed so as to avoid segregation of the materials and the displacement of the reinforcement. As nearly as practicable, the concrete shall be dropped vertically without hitting reinforcement, sleeves or forms into its final position in order to avoid separation of coarse aggregates from concrete. After the initial set of concrete, the forms shall not be jarred and no strain shall be placed on the projecting reinforcing.
3. Formed concrete shall be deposited in horizontal layers not deeper than 2 feet avoiding inclined layers and inclined construction joints. The depth of layers shall be shallow enough so that the succeeding layer will be placed before the previous layer has attained its initial set. Concrete shall not be allowed nor shall it be allowed to flow horizontally or on slopes in the form. Concrete placing on a slope shall begin at the lower end of the slope and progress upward.
4. Construction joints shall be made only where located on the drawings or unless approved otherwise by the Engineer. Pours shall be planned to provide for the continuous placing of concrete from one construction joint to another. The face edges of all joints that are exposed to view shall be carefully finished true to line and elevation.
5. In slab construction, placing of the concrete shall be started at the far end of the work so that each batch will be dumped against previously placed concrete, not away from it. The concrete shall not be dumped in separate piles and the piles then leveled and worked together. For floor slabs on earth, additional requirements in Paragraph 3.09 shall apply.
6. Columns shall be placed in approximately 4-foot sections, with each section being vibrated and compacted as placed.
7. If depositing of concrete must be stopped short of a full placement, it shall be leveled to a horizontal plane or stopped against a vertical bulkhead. Such bulkhead or horizontal plane shall be located only as approved by the Engineer.
Cast-In-Place Concrete 03300-8 Job No. D00CO68C E. Compaction:
1. All concrete shall be consolidated by vibration so that the concrete is thoroughly worked around the reinforcement, around embedded items, and into corners of forms, eliminating all air or stone pockets which may cause honeycombing, pitting, or planes of weakness. All compaction shall be done by use of high frequency internal vibrators. Where the vibrator cannot be inserted into the concrete, compaction shall be done by spading, rodding or forking.
2. Frequency of vibrator shall be not less than 7,000 impulses per minute. The Contractor shall provide a sufficient number of vibrators to properly consolidate all concrete immediately after placing. At least one standby vibrator shall be on hand at all times during placement of the concrete.
3. Vibration shall not be applied through contact with reinforcement of forms. Vibration shall penetrate previously deposited concrete sufficiently to prevent pockets or voids or construction joints from occurring between pours, but must not be applied to concrete which has set up sufficiently to cease to be plastic under vibration.
3.09 FLOOR SLABS ON EARTH
A. Prior to placing interior slab, a moisture barrier with minimum edge laps of 6 inches shall be provided over the cushion fill.
B. All earth-supported slabs shall be reinforced as called for on the plans. Plain bar dowels shall be provided as detailed for construction and expansion joints. Such dowels shall be wrapped or greased on one side of the joints to prevent bonding.
C. Care shall be taken in handling and placing the reinforcement. Reinforcement shall be positively set to the level required within the slab(s) as indicated on the plans.
D. Expansion joints with expansion joint filler shall be provided at locations indicated on plans.
E. Expansion joints shall be sealed with joint sealing compound at least 3/8" deep.
3.10 CONCRETE WALKS ON GROUND
A. Concrete walks shall be of one lift construction, 4 inches in thickness with the thickened edge, and of Class 2,500 concrete.
B. All reinforcing steel shall be continuous across construction joints. Keys and/or inclined dowels shall be provided as required. Unless otherwise indicated, joints shall be sealed with joint sealing compound.
Cast-In-Place Concrete 03300-9 Job No. D00CO68C C. Expansion joints shall be provided not more than 32 feet apart; at junctions with curbs; where walks abut building, platform, and other fixed structures; and elsewhere as shown in the plans. Reinforcement or other embedded metal items bonded to the concrete (except dowels in floors or walls bonded only one side of joint) shall not be permitted to extend continuously through any expansion joint. Joints shall be sealed with expansion joint filler and sealing compound at least 3/8" deep.
D. Contraction/control joints shall be provided where shown on the plans and shall be 1/4 the depth of the slab or a minimum of 1" deep. Unless otherwise indicated on the plans, joints may either be tooled, formed-in-place or saw cut. When saw-cut joint are provided, cutting shall be timed properly with there set of the concrete so that it is firm enough not to be torn or damaged by the cutting blade and before random shrinkage cracking can form in the slab. In any case, cutting shall be completed not later than 12 hours after the concrete is placed and finished. Unless otherwise noted on the plans, joints shall be sealed with joint sealing compound.
E. Concrete shall be tamped and screed to grade and section, sufficient mortar brought to the surface for finishing and the required finish given as specified hereafter before the concrete sets. Steps in connection with walks shall have same finish as walks. All edges except for those at saw-cut control joints shall be rounded to 1/8" radius. Cross slope for sloped or crowned walks shall be 5/32" per foot. No pedestrian traffic shall be permitted on concrete walks for a period of three days after placing.
F. Walks shall be finished as indicated hereinafter and scored where shown or called for on the plans.
3.11 FINISHING OF SLABS
A. Finish A: Scratched Finish: After concrete has been placed, struck off, consolidated and leveled, the surfaces shall be roughened with stiff brushes or rakes (cross scratched) before final set.
B. Finish B: Light Trowelled Finish: After the concrete has been placed, struck off, consolidated and leveled, the concrete shall not be worked further until ready for floating. Floating shall begin when the water sheen has disappeared and/or when the mix has stiffened sufficiently to permit the proper operation of a power- driven float. The surface shall then be consolidated with power-driven floats of the impact type except in thin sections. Hand floating with wood or cork-faced floats shall be used in locations inaccessible to the power-driven machine. The slab shall then be steel troweled to a uniform, smooth, texture.
C. Finish C: Trowel Finish: The surface shall be finished first with impact power floats, as specified above for Finish B, then with power trowels and finally with steel hand trowels. The first trowelling after power floating shall be done by a power trowel and shall produce a smooth surface which is relatively free of
Cast-In-Place Concrete 03300-10 Job No. D00CO68C defects but which may still contain some trowel marks.
Additional trowelling shall be done by hand after the surface has hardened sufficiently. The final trowelling shall be done to a point when a ringing sound is produced as the trowel is moved over the surface. The finished surface shall be free of any trowel marks ands shall be uniform in texture and appearance. On surfaces intended to support floor coverings, any defects of sufficient magnitude to show through the floor covering shall be removed by grinding.
D. Finish D: Broom Finish: The concrete slab shall be given a coarse transverse scored texture by drawing a broom across the surface. The operation shall follow immediately after steel- trowelling performed under Finish B above.
E. Finish E: Non-Slip Finish: the surface shall be given a dust-on-application of abrasive aggregates. Finish with steel trowel but avoid over-trowelling. The rate of application of abrasive aggregates shall be not less than 25 pounds per 100 square feet or application shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
F. Finish F: Swirled Finish: After the concrete surface has been struck off, darbied, power floated and steel trowelled, the surface shall be given a swirl float finish. The float should be worked flat on the surface in semi-circular or fan-like motion.
G. Finishing Tolerances for slabs as classified on the plans shall be accordance with the following:
1. Finishes shall be true planes within + or - 1/4" in 10 ft., as determined by a 1-ft. straightedge placed anywhere on the slab in any direction.
Unless otherwise shown on the plans, all slabs shall meet this tolerance. The tolerances will be checked prior to moving of forms or shores.
3.12 SELECTION OF FLOOR FINISHES
Unless otherwise indicated on plans, the following floor finishes shall be used.
1. Finish A:Scratched Finish: For surfaces intended to receive bonded applied cementitious applications, (such as setting beds for ceramic tile or quarry tile on 1st floor, where no membrane is called for).
2. Finish B: Light Trowelled Finish: For surfaces intended to receive roofing, waterproofing and membrane (such as setting beds on membranes, 2nd floor and above).
3. Finish C : Trowelled Finish: For interior floors (including refrigerator floor) and floors intended to receive floor coverings.
4. Finish D: Broom Finish: For driveways.
Cast-In-Place Concrete 03300-11 Job No. D00CO68C
5. Finish E: Non-Slip Finish: For platforms, interior and exterior steps, landings and ramps.
6. Finish F: Swirled Finish: For upper floor lanais or balconies.
3.13 CURING AND PROTECTION
A. All concrete shall be cured for a period of not less than 7 days by one of the methods listed below. During this curing period, the concrete shall be maintained with minimum moisture loss at a relatively constant temperature. Fresh concrete shall be protected from heavy rains, flowing water, mechanical injury, and injurious action of the sun. Curing method selected must be compatible with the finish to be applied to the concrete.
Curing shall immediately follow the finishing operation.
B. Water Curing: If cured with water, concrete shall be kept wet by mechanical sprinklers, by ponding, or by any other method which will keep the surfaces continuously wet.
C. Saturated Sand Curing: Surfaces cured with sand shall be covered with a minimum of 1-inch thickness of sand which shall be kept uniformly distributed and continuously saturated during the entire curing period.
D. Curing Compounds: Curing compounds shall not be used on concrete surfaces that are to receive paint finish, acid stain or resilient flooring, except those that are recommended by the manufacturer to be compatible with the applied finish. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a letter certifying that the curing compound is compatible with the applied finish. Application shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. If curing, sealing or other compounds are used which are incompatible with applied finish, such compound shall be thoroughly removed by grinding with a terrazzo grinder.
E. Waterproof Paper: Waterproof paper or opaque polyethylene film conforming to ASTM C171 may be used. The paper or film shall be anchored securely and all edges sealed or applied in such a manner as to prevent moisture escaping from the concrete. Waterproof paper shall not be used on floors that will be exposed when finished.
3.14 CLEANUP
Contractor shall clean up all concrete and cement materials, equipment and debris upon completion of any portion of concrete work and upon completion of the entire concrete and related work.
END OF SECTION
Cast-In-Place Concrete 03300-12 Job No. D00CO68C DIVISION 4 - MASONRY
SECTION 04220 - CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL CONDITIONS
As specified in SECTION 01019 – GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
The masonry manufacturer's certification that the masonry units comply with ASTM C90 and the curing requirements specified herein shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer upon request.
1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Masonry Units: Masonry units delivered to the jobsite shall conform to the moisture content requirements as specified under ASTM C 90. Masonry units shall be stored off the ground and protected from inclement weather and physical damage. All units shall be handled with reasonable care to prevent marring or damaging of faces, edges and corners of units. In no case shall dumping of units from hand trucks or wheelbarrows be permitted.
Where used in exposed wall construction, any unit with exposed face or faces having chips, cracks, or other imperfections more than 1 inch in dimension shall be rejected.
B. Mortar and Grout Materials: Portland cement, masonry cement, lime and admixtures shall be stored in such a manner as to prevent deterioration or contamination with foreign matter. Cement which has become caked, partially set or otherwise deteriorated, or any material which becomes damaged or contaminated, shall be rejected.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Hollow Concrete Masonry Units shall be load-bearing units and shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 90, "Standard Specifications for Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Units," Grade N with a minimum compressive strength of 1900 psi. Units shall be 2-core type, 8-inch nominal height, 16-inch nominal length and width as indicated on the plans. Units for jamb, corner sill, lintel and other special shapes shall be provided as required.
Concrete Unit Masonry 04220-1 Job No. D00COD00CO68C68A All units shall be sound, free of cracks, straight and true. They shall be either steam-cured or cured under atmospheric conditions for a minimum of 30 days. Color shall be standard with manufacturer. Blocks shall be laid in a running bond pattern.
B. Screen Blocks shall be standard units manufactured to same specifications as non-load-bearing concrete block masonry units, pattern as indicated.
C. Portland Cement shall conform to ASTM C-150, Type I or Type II.
D. Masonry Cement shall be of such quality that a 1 part masonry cement to 2-1/2 parts masonry aggregate mix tested in accordance with ASTM C 270 shall have a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 2,000 psi. ("Supermortar" by Hawaiian Cement, "Kaiser Mortar" Kaiser Cement & Gypsum Corp., or approved equal.)
E. Aggregate for use in mortar shall conform to ASTM C-144.
F. Aggregate for use in grout shall conform to ASTM C-404, with grading in accordance with ASTM D-488, No. 10.
G. Water used in mixing mortar or grout shall be fresh, clean and drinkable.
H. Reinforcing Steel shall be deformed bars conforming to ASTM A615, grade as shown on the plans.
I. Rebar Wire Positioners shall be galvanized, No. 9 gauge wire, manufactured positioners per ASTM A 82 or other suitable devices.
J. Additives/Admixtures for mortar shall be "Easy Spread" by American Colloid Co. or "MRF" by Gibco.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 MORTAR AND GROUT
A. The proportioning of materials for mortar and grout shall be by volume and done in such manner that the specified proportions can be controlled and accurately maintained. Fine aggregate shall be measured in a damp loose condition. Mixing shall be by a mechanical batch mixer for at least 3 minutes for mortar and 5 minutes for grout, but for not more than 10 minutes. Hand mixing shall be permitted only for small batches of 3 cubic feet or less.
B. Mortar shall be freshly prepared and uniformly mixed in one of the following proportions:
1. Type M - Masonry Cement Mortar:
Concrete Unit Masonry 04220-2 Job No. D00COD00CO68C68A
2 sacks Portland cement 1/2 to 1 – 7 lb. bag Easy Spred 6 cu. ft. mortar aggregate
2. Type M - Masonry Cement Mortar:
1 sack Portland cement 3 ounces MRF 2-1/4 to 2-3/4 cu. ft. mortar aggregate
3. Type S Mortar:
2 sacks Portland cement 1 - 7 lb. bag Easy Spred 9 cu. ft. mortar aggregate
4. Type S Mortar:
1 sack Portland cement 3 ounces MRF 2-1/2 to 3 cu. ft. mortar aggregate
The above mixes 1 through 4 shall be prepared strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Placement of the mortar shall be completed within 2-1/2 hours after mixing. No materials which start to set shall be retempered.
Grout mixed on-site shall conform to ASTM C 476 and shall be freshly prepared and uniformly mixed in the following proportion:
1 part Portland cement
Fine aggregate: 2-1/4 to 3 times the sum of the volumes of the cementitious materials. Coarse aggregate: 1 to 2 times the sum of the volumes of the cementitious materials.
Grout designed by Ready-mix suppliers may be used upon approval of the Architect/Engineer.
Sufficient water shall be used to produce a consistency just fluid enough for pouring without segregation. Grout shall be used and placed in final position within 90 minutes after mixing, but shall in no case be used after initial set has occurred.
In any event, the grout shall attain not less than 2,500 psi 28-day compressive strength. per ASTM C 1019 unless noted otherwise on drawings.
Concrete Unit Masonry 04220-3 Job No. D00COD00CO68C68A 3.02 REINFORCEMENT
A. Reinforcement shall be free from scale, loose flaky rust or other coatings that will destroy bond. It shall be straight except for bends around corners or where bends or hooks are detailed. Size and spacing shall be as indicated on the drawings.
B. Vertical reinforcement shall be accurately placed and secured against displacement by rebar wire positioners at top and bottom and at intervals not to exceed 200 diameters of the reinforcement. (8 feet for #4 bars; 10 feet for #5 bars). Dowels and splices shall be lapped as indicated but not less than 45 diameters or 24 inches, whichever is longer. At jambs of doors, windows and other openings, and corners and ends of walls, including those abutting concrete, one #4 bar shall be installed in the end cell and that cell shall be filled with grout. Bars adjacent to door openings and at corners and ends of walls shall extend the full height of walls. Bars adjacent to window and other openings shall extend at least 24 inches beyond corners of openings.
C. At intersections, corners and splices, horizontal reinforcing shall be placed, bent and lapped as shown on plans. End laps shall be at least 45 diameters.
3.03 ANCHORS
Work with other trades shall be coordinated as necessary to set into tile walls all anchors, bolts, nailing blocks, etc. Anchors shall be grouted around with sufficient mortar to make them secure.
3.04 LAYING
A. General: All masonry units shall be clean and dry and shall be handled so that edges and faces will not be chipped, spalled, or cracked. All beds on which masonry is to be laid shall be cleaned. All work shall be built plump, level, and true, within the tolerances specified below, and shall be laid up with whole units except as closures. Masonry units in walls shall be laid so that one face of the wall is a true flat plane. Unless otherwise indicated on the plans, this shall be on the inside face. Where one face of a wall is to be plastered or covered, the exposed face shall be the true flat plane. All cutting andfitting as may be required or necessary to accommodate other trades shall be done neatly using a power driven carborundum saw. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to control any dust pollution caused by the cutting operations. All drilling and cutting of small holes shall be neatly done. Bolts, anchors, ties, conduits, and similar items for the installation of work under other sections of these specifications shall, as far as practicable, be placed as the work progresses. All the walls and partitions shall be carried to the underside of beams, slabs, or joists, as the case may be, and shall be connected to the top as shown on the plans.
Concrete Unit Masonry 04220-4 Job No. D00COD00CO68C68A B. Allowable Tolerances:
1. Variation from the Plumb:
a. In the lines and surfaces of columns, walls and arrises:
in 10 ft. 1/4" in any story or 20 ft. max. 3/8" in 40 ft. or more 1/2" in any story or 20 ft. max. 1/4" in 40 ft. or more 1/2"
b. For external corners, control joints and other conspicuous lines:
2. Variation from the level or grades indicated on plans:
For exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves and other conspicuous lines:
in any bay or 20 ft. max. 1/4" in 40 ft. or more 1/2"
3. Variation of the linear building lines from established position in plan and related portion of columns, walls and partitions:
in any bay or 20 ft. max. 1/2" in 40 ft. or more 3/4"
4. Variation in thickness of walls:
minus 1/4"; plus 1/2"
5. For window and door openings:
a. Maximimum variations as specified in Paragraphs B.1 and B.2 for plumb and level of masonry work.
b. Maximum variation of 3/8" in each dimension from that specified or dimensioned.
c. Tolerance requirements for both dimensions and plumb-and-level muxt be met.
6. Checking and setting:
The following tools and methods shall be the minimum or acceptable type:
Concrete Unit Masonry 04220-5 Job No. D00COD00CO68C68A a. Plumb and level shall be determined by level and/or pull string method.
b. Any instrument at least 4 feet long shall be used for leveling or runs. A shorter level may be used of cross-leveling of units.
C. Masonry units shall not be wet before being used and units which have gotten wet shall be thoroughly dried before being used. Where no bond pattern is shown, the wall shall be laid up in straight uniform course with regular running bond.
D. Masonry units in first course shall be laid with shall mortar beds not exceeding 3/4" in thickness. Webs of adjoining cells containing reinforcement shall also be bedded in mortar to prevent escape of grout.
E. Vertical head joints shall be mortared well for a thickness equal to the face shell of the block and these joints shall be shoved tightly so that the mortar bonds well to both blocks. Joints shall be solidly filled from the face of the block to the depth of the face shell.
F. If it is necessary to move a block so as to open a joint, the block shall be removed from the wall, cleaned and reset in fresh mortar.
G. Mortar joints shall be straight, clean and in a thickness of 3/8" + 1/8". All exposed horizontal and vertical joints shall be tooled with a 1/2" to 5/8" round bar at least 14 inches long to produce a dense, slightly concave surface well bonded to the block at the edges. Tooling shall compact the mortar, pressing the excess mortar out of the joint rather than gouging it out. Use a 3/8" dia. half-round molding to simulate a concave horizontal joint between a concrete bond beam and the hollow tile wall below. Where walls are to receive plaster or waterproofing or where they are not exposed, such as below finish grade and where special glazed finish is indicated, the joints shall be struck flush.
H. All hollow masonry units shall be built to preserve the unobstructed vertical continuity of the cells to be filled. Walls and cross webs forming such cells shall be full-bedded in mortar to prevent the leakage of grout.
I. All cells containing reinforcement shall be filled solidly with grout in lifts not exceeding 5 feet unless otherwise shown on the plans. Other cells, where indicated to be solid for anchors or such items, shall also be filled. When grouting is stopped for one hour or longer, horizontal construction joints shall be formed by stopping the pour of grout 1-1/2" below the top of the uppermost unit.
J. Grout shall be vibrated 3 to 5 minutes after pour.
K. Care shall be taken to prevent mortar splotches. All forms shall be made tight and concrete or grout spilled on the wall shall be washed off immediately before it can set up. Walls shall be protected against stains and excess mortar shall be
Concrete Unit Masonry 04220-6 Job No. D00COD00CO68C68A wiped off the surface as the work progresses. After the wall is constructed it shall not be saturated with water for curing, cleaning, etc.
3.05 PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A. While masonry walls are being built, they shall be protected when not being worked on to prevent rain from saturating the wall. Covering of suitable materials such as canvas or plastic sheeting shall be placed atop the wall and shall extend at least two feet on either side of the wall. Covering shall be weighted down to prevent it form being lifted by the wind.
B. At the completion of the work, all holes or defective mortar joints in exposed masonry shall be pointed and where necessary defective joints shall be cut out and repointed. All exposed masonry shall be thoroughly cleaned of mortar drippings, sand and splotches during the course of the work. No smoothing of a wall surface which produces a "bright spot" when painted will be accepted. All adjoining work subject to damage shall be carefully protected.
C. Upon completion of work, all surplus, waste materials, rubbish and debris shall be removed from premises, leaving same in clean and satisfactory condition.
END OF SECTION
Concrete Unit Masonry 04220-7 Job No. D00COD00CO68C68A
DIVISION 5 - METAL FABRICATIONS
SECTION 05550 - METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
As specified in Section 01019 - GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Work includes, but is not limited, to stair railings, guardrails, and metal bollards.
B. Related Work Specified In Other Sections:
1. SECTION 03300 - CAST - IN - PLACE CONCRETE.
2. SECTION 09900 - PAINTING.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of SECTION 01300 - SUBMITTALS.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings to Engineer indicating profiles, sizes, connection attachments, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories.
1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Protect carpentry materials during transit, delivery, storage and handling to prevent damage, soiling and deterioration.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 RAILINGS
A. Design, fabricate, and test railing assemblies in accordance with the most stringent requirements of ASTM E985 and applicable local code.
B. Distributed Loads: Design railing assembly, wall rails, and attachments to resist distributed force of 75 pounds per linear foot applied to the top of the assembly and in any direction, without damage or permanent set. Test in accordance with ASTM E 935.
C. Concentrated Loads: Design railing assembly, wall rails, and attachments to resist a concentrated force of 200 pounds applied at any point on the top of the assembly and in any direction, without damage or permanent set. Test in accordance with ASTM E 935.
Metal Fabrications 05500-1 Job No. D00CO68C
D. Allow for expansion and contraction of members and building movement without damage to connections or members.
E. Dimensions: See drawings for configurations and heights.
1. Top Rails and Wall Rails: 1-1/2 inches diameter, round.
2. Posts: 1-1/2 inches diameter, round.
F. Provide anchors and other components as required to attach to structure, made of same materials as railing components unless otherwise indicated; where exposed fasteners are unavoidable provide flush countersunk fasteners.
G. Provide slip-on non-weld mechanical fittings to join lengths, seal open ends, and conceal exposed mounting bolts and nuts, including but not limited to elbows, T- shapes, splice connectors, flanges, escutcheons, and wall brackets.
2.02 ALUMINUM MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Pipe: Schedule 40; ASTM B429/B429M, ASTM B241/B241M, or ASTM B483/B483M.
B. Aluminum Tube: Minimum wall thickness of 0.127 inch; ASTM B429/B429M, ASTM B241/B241M, or ASTM B483/B483M.
C. Non-Weld Mechanical Fittings: Slip-on cast aluminum, for Schedule 40 pipe, with flush setscrews for tightening by standard hex wrench, no bolts or screw fasteners.
D. Welding Fittings: No exposed fasteners; cast aluminum.
E. Straight Splice Connectors: Concealed spigot; cast aluminum.
F. Exposed Fasteners: No exposed bolts or screws.
2.03 STEEL RAILING SYSTEM
A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Grade B Schedule 40, galvanized finish.
B. Non-Weld Mechanical Fittings: Slip-on, galvanized malleable iron castings, for Schedule 40 pipe, with flush setscrews for tightening by standard hex wrench, no bolts or screw fasteners.
C. Exposed Fasteners: No exposed bolts or screws.
D. Galvanizing: In accordance with requirements of ASTM A123/A123M.
1. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I - Inorganic.
Metal Fabrications 05500-2 Job No. D00CO68C
2.04 FABRICATION
A. Accurately form components to suit specific project conditions and for proper connection to building structure.
B. Fit and shop assemble components in largest practical sizes for delivery to site.
C. Fabricate components with joints tightly fitted and secured. Provide spigots and sleeves to accommodate site assembly and installation.
D. Welded Joints:
1. Exterior Components: Continuously seal joined pieces by continuous welds. Drill condensate drainage holes at bottom of members at locations that will not encourage water intrusion.
2. Interior Components: Continuously seal joined pieces by continuous welds.
3. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius.
2.05 BOLLARDS
6 inch round bollard, painted, galvanized steel, #4 Satin finish, pipe is Schedule 40. Height, mounting, as indicated on Drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION
A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.
B. Supply items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry with setting templates, for installation as work of other sections.
C. Apply one coat of bituminous paint to concealed aluminum surfaces that will be in contact with cementitious or dissimilar materials.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install components plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects, with tight joints.
B. Anchor railings securely to structure.
C. Conceal anchor bolts and screws whenever possible. Where not concealed, use flush countersunk fastenings.
Metal Fabrications 05500-3 Job No. D00CO68C
D. Embed bollards in concrete in accordance to manufacturer instructions and as indicated in drawings.
3.03 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch (6 mm) per floor level, non-cumulative.
B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch (6 mm).
C. Maximum Out-of-Position: 1/4 inch (6 mm).
END OF SECTION
Metal Fabrications 05500-4 Job No. D00CO68C DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS
SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL CONDITIONS
As specified in SECTION 01019 - GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS.
1.02 GENERAL REQUIRMENTS
Provide all rough carpentry, complete, including but not limited to wall studs, eave framing, roof rafters, rough bucks, blocking, furring strips, performance rated wood I-Joists, metal framing anchors, and rough hardware.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Grading Marks: Factory mark each piece of lumber with type, grade, mill, and grading agency identification. Certificate of inspection and grading by a recognized agency may be submitted with each shipment in lieu of factory marking, at Contractor’s option.
B. Wood Preservative Treatment: In accordance with SECTION 06311 - PRESERVATIVE TREATED LUMBER.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Certificates: Provide a certificate of treatment showing compliance with the specifications, and a certificate of dryness for all wood specified to be dried after treatment.
B. Material Certificates: Dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use, and design values approved by American Lumber Standard’s Committee, ALSC, Board of Review.
C. Product data and ICC Evaluation Reports: Engineered wood products, underlayments, insulating sheathing, air-infiltration barriers, metal framing anchors, and construction adhesives.
D. Shop Drawings and Calculations: For Wood I-Joists submit shop drawings and structural calculations prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional engineer. Show fabrication and installations details for wood I- Joists.
1. Shop drawings shall show location, pitch, span configuration, and spacing for each type of wood I-Joists required.
Rough Carpentry 06100-1 Job No. D00COD00CO68C68A
a. Indicated sizes, stress grades, and species of lumber. 2. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer currently licensed in the State of Hawaii responsible for their preparation. a. Structural analysis shall include joist hanger calculations indicating type and size.
1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING
Delivery and Storage: Keep materials dry at all times. Protect against exposure to weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber and provide air circulation within stacks.
1.06 JOB CONDITIONS
Coordination: Fit carpentry work to other work; scribe and cope as required for accurate fit. Correlate location of furring, rough bucks, blocking, and similar supports to allow proper attachment of other work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Lumber, General:
Factory-mark each piece of lumber with type, grade, mill and grading agency, except omit marking from surfaces to be exposed with transparent finish or without finish.
Nominal sizes are indicated, except as shown by detail dimensions. Provide actual sizes as required by PS 20, for moisture content specified for each use.
1. Provide dressed lumbers, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Provide seasoned lumber with 15% maximum moisture content at time of dressing.
B. Framing Lumber:
1. Light Framing Lumber: 2 inches through 4 inches thick, less than 6 inches wide, such as studs, plates, blocking, rough bucks, furring, etc., provide Construction grade, Douglas Fir/Larch.
2. For structural framing 2 inches through 4 inches, less than 6 inches and wider, provide No.1 grade, Douglas Fir, (WCLB or WWPA).
Rough Carpentry 06100-2 Job No. D00COD00CO68C68A
3. For exposed structural 4 x 12 or 4 x16 members for fascias and secrity trellis, provide Select Structural Grade Doulgas Fir, rough sawn, including all exposed edges and faces.
4. For exposed 3 inch x 3inch net Doulgas Fir members, provide Select Grade, vertical grain, resawn.
C. Structural Members: For rafters, provide No. 1 Grade, Douglas Fir/Larch for 6 inches and wider beams and other members, provide No. 1 grade.
D. Wood I-Joists: Prefabricated units, I-shaped in cross section, with chords made from solid or structural composite lumber bonded with waterproof glue and wood- based structural panel webs, let into and bonded to chords. Provide units complying with material requirements of and with structural capacities established and monitored according to ASTM D 5055 ICC Evaluation Report No. ERS-1153.
1. Web Material: Oriented strand board, complying with DOC PS 1, Exposure 1.
2. Chord Material: Stress graded lumber complying with grading rues No. 17 of West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. Lumber shall be air dries to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent at the time of fabrication.
3. Structural Properties: Provide units complying with the properties and structural loading indicated on the Drawings.
E. Rim Boards: Product designed to be used as a load-bearing member and to brace wood I-Joists at bearing ends, complying with research/evaluation report for I-Joists.
1. Manufacturer: Provide products by same manufacturer as I-Joists.
2. Material: Glue-laminated strand lumber.
3. Thickness and Depth: As indicated.
4. Provide performance-rated product complying with APA PRR-401, rim board grade, factory marked with APA trademark indicating thickness, grade, and compliance with APA standard
F. Glue Laminated Beams:
1. All Glue Laminated (GLULAM) beams shall be douglas fir 2400F Series, with exterior type adhesive.
Rough Carpentry 06100-3 Job No. D00COD00CO68C68A
2. All concealed beams shall be industrial grade. All exposed beams shall be appearance grade.
3. All GLULAM beams shall display an AITC quality stamp certifying compliance with voluntary product standard PS-56.
4. All GLULAM beams shall be provided with a standard camber based on a 2400 foot radius, unless noted otherwise.
G. Plywood:
1. Plywood roof Sheathing: PS 1, Grade Structural I, with T&G edges for thicknesses 3/4" or greater; thickness as shown on drawings.
2. Softwood Plywood: Comply with U.S. Product Standard PS I-74 for softwood plywood, Group 1, Douglas Fir, Exterior Grade only.
a. A-B Grade: Where on one side only.
b. C-C Grade: Where used at gutters, or fully concealed.
c. Provide rough sawn Douglas Fir plywood where shown, Grade A-C.
H. Miscellaneous Materials:
1. Fasteners and Anchorages: Provide size, type, material and finish as indicated and as recommended by applicable standards, complying with applicable Federal Specifications and ANSI for nails, staples, screws, bolts, nuts, washers and anchoring devices. Provide metal hangers and framing anchors of the size and type recommended by the manufacturer for each use including recommended nails. Provide all fasteners and anchorages with hot-dip zinc coating (ASTM A 153).
2. Moisture Barrier: 30-lbs. roofing felt, asphalt saturated, ASTM D 226.
3. Bronze Wire Cloth: 14 x 14 mesh, 0.020 inch wire thickness; for continuous soffit vents.
4. I-Joist Hangers: U-shaped joist hangers with 2-inch long seat and 1-1/4- inch wide nailing flanges full depth of joist. Nailing flanges provide lateral support at joist top chord. Manufactured by Simpson Strong Tie.
a. Metal thickness: As required to meet structural loading and performance
2.02 WOOD TREATMENT
Rough Carpentry 06100-4 Job No. D00COD00CO68C68A
Treat all rough lumber in accordance with SECTION 06311 - PRESERVATIVE TREATED LUMBER.
2.03 FIRE RETARDENT TREATMENT
As specified in SECTION 06311 - PRESERVATIVE TREATED LUMBER.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. General: Discard units of material with defects which might impair quality of work, and units which are too small to use in fabricating work with minimum joints or optimum joints arrangement.
1. Set carpentry work accurately to required levels and lines with members plumb and true and accurately cut and fitted.
2. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as shown as required by recognized standards. Countersink nail heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes.
3. Use common wire nails, except as otherwise indicated. Use finishing nails for finish work. Select fasteners of size that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting of wood; predrill as required.
B. Wood Framing, General:
1. Provide framing members of sizes and on spacings shown, and frame openings as shown, or if not shown, comply with recommendations of ‘Manual for House framing’ of National Forests Products Association. Do not splice structural members between supports.
2. Anchor and nail as shown, and to comply with ‘Recommended Nailing Schedule’ of ‘Manual for House Framing’ and other recommendations of the N.F.P.A..
3. Provide moisture barrier below all wood plates resting on concrete or masonry.
C. Wood Blocking, Rough Bucks, and Furring Strips: Provide wherever shown and where required for attachment of other work. Form to shapes as shown and cuts as required for true line and level of work to be attached. Coordinate location with other work involved. Attach substrates as required to support applied loading. Countersink bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise shown.
Rough Carpentry 06100-5 Job No. D00COD00CO68C68A
D. Wood I-Joist Installation:
1. Keep joist upright at all times. Plumb joists and hold chords in a straight line from the time joists are set in place until sheathing is applied.
2. Provide cross bridging, bracing or both as required to adequately brace joists. Install bridging as erection proceeds and install temporary bracing to maintain alignment and prevent lateral movement.
3. Securely Fasten sheathing to top chord, staggering the nailing to avoid splitting and to ensure nailing into each chord member.
4. Don’t drill or cut top or bottom chords. Web members may be cut in accordance with the joist manufacturer’s recommendation
E. Retreat cut and penetrated lumber in accordance with SECTION 06311 - PRESERVATIVE TREATED LUMBER.
END OF SECTION
Rough Carpentry 06100-6 Job No. D00COD00CO68C68A
SECTION 06200 - FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
As specified in Section 01019 - GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS.
1.02 SUMMARY
Work includes, but not limited to, finish carpentry work, wood trim, millwork, and rough hardware.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of SECTION 01300 - SUBMITTALS.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, materials, large scale details, attachment devices, and other components.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Grading Marks: Factory mark each piece of lumber and plywood with type, grade, mill, and grading agency identification. Certificate of inspection and grading by a recognized agency may be submitted with each shipment in lieu of factory marking, at Contractor's option.
B. VOC content of adhesives shall be equal to or less than the current VOC content limits of the South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule 1168, "Adhesive and Sealant Application".
1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect finish carpentry materials during transit, delivery, storage, and handling to prevent damage, soiling, and deterioration.
B. Store materials away from threat of termite or other insect infestation.
C. Handle manufactured materials as recommended by the manufacturer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 WOOD PRODUCT QUALITY STANDARDS
A. Softwood Lumber Standards: Comply with American Lumber Standards Committee (ALSC) PS 20 and with applicable grading rules of the respective grading and inspection agency for the species and product indicated.
Carpentry and Related Work 06200-1 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
B. Hardwood Lumber Standard: Comply with National Hardwood Lumber Association (NHLA) rules.
C. Plywood Standards: Comply with American Plywood Association (APA) PS 1 for softwood plywood and PS 51 for hardwood plywood.
D. Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards: Comply with Architectural Woodwork Institute, Architectural Woodwork Standards (AWS), Guide Specifications and Quality Certification Program, latest edition.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. General: General: Nominal sizes are indicated, except as shown by detailed dimensions. Provide dressed or worked and dressed lumber, as applicable, manufactured to the actual sizes as required by PS 20 or to actual sizes and pattern as shown, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Interior Finish Carpentry:
1. Solid lumber shall be milled to profiles indicated of Douglas Fir vertical grain, B and Better, poplar or birch for paint finish.
2. AWS, Custom Grade.
3. Wood Blocking: Utility grade or better, Douglas Fir/Larch or Hem/Fir.
2.03 FABRICATION
Millwork and custom casework shall be fabricated at the mill or casework shop in accordance with detailed drawings, in as large units as practicable for shipment and introduction into permanent position in an orderly arrangement for neat and rigid field assembly. All units when erected in place shall be straight, square, plumb, level and free from damage and tool marks. All joints shall be made up with waterproof glue. Nails and screws shall be placed in concealed surfaces to the maximum extent possible.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Discard units of material which are unsound, warped, bowed, twisted, improperly treated or not adequately seasoned.
B. Install the work plumb, level, true and straight with no distortions. Install to a tolerance of 1/8-inch in 8-feet for plumb and level units.
C. Scribe and cut work to fit adjoining work, and refinish cut surfaces or repair damaged finish at cuts.
D. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible,
Carpentry and Related Work 06200-2 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
using full-length pieces (from maximum lengths of lumber available) to the greatest extent possible. Stagger joints in adjacent and related members. Cope at returns, miter at corners, to produce tight fitting joints with full surface contact throughout length of joint. Use scarf joints for end-to-end joints. Sand smooth for imperceptible joints.
E. Anchor finish carpentry work to anchorage devices or blocking built-in or directly attached to substrates. Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and where prefinished matching fasteners heads are required, use fine finishing nail for exposed nailings, countersunk and filled flush with finished surface.
F. Re-treat cut and penetrated lumber in accordance with SECTION 06311 - PRESERVATIVE TREATED LUMBER.
END OF SECTION
Carpentry and Related Work 06200-3 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
SECTION 06311 - PRESERVATIVE TREATED LUMBERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
As specified in SECTION 01019 - GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS.
1.02 SUMMARY
Preservative treat all lumber and plywood unless specified or noted otherwise.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of SECTION 01300 - SUBMITTALS.
B. Manufacturer’s Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical product information on all products to be used, including recommendations and restrictions on wood species and uses.
C. Manufacturer’s Instructions: Submit manufacturer’s written instructions for handing, disposing, and field treating treated lumber.
D. Certificate of Treatment: Submit a certificate of treatment to the Engineer showing compliance with these specifications, both as to kiln drying and type of treatment performed, including dip treatment.
E. Certification: The Contractor shall submit a written certification to the Engineer that all wood used and left in place on this job was treated in accordance with these specifications and that all cuts and penetrations made subsequent to the treatment were coated with preservatives in compliance with item entitled "INSTALLATION" hereinbelow.
F. Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS): Submit MSDS for products used and keep one posted at the project site.
G. Treatment Schedule: Prior to treatment, submit and complete list of all would products, including each species if treated with different preservative material and the treatment material proposed for use.
H. Warranty: Submit warranty as stipulated in item entitled "WARRANTY" hereinbelow.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Preservatives containing arsenic such as Chromated Copper Arsenate.(CCA) and Ammoniacal Copper Zinc Arsenate (ACZA) shall not be used.
B. Perma - Clear 65 or other zinc napthanate products shall not be used.
Preservative Treated Lumber 06311-1 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
C. Comply with all State OSHL and pollution control regulations of the State of Hawaii and EPA.
D. Do not use treatments containing EPA banned chemicals.
E. Materials shall be specifically recommended by the manufacturer for species of wood, use intended, and exposure indicated.
F. Labeling: Permanent ink stamp or durable tag permanently fastened as stipulated in ICC IBC, as amended.
1.05 WARRANTY
A. The Contractor shall issue to the State a written warranty that he will replace all treated wood which is attacked by subterranean termites within a period of 2 years from the date of project acceptance (unless a longer period of time is standard with the manufacturer) up total cost of $5,000.00 (unless higher amount standard with the manufacturer) or is attacked by dry wood termites or deteriorates due to dry rot within the first 5 years of the project acceptance date.
B. The surety shall not be held liable beyond 2 years from the project acceptance date.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Wood treated with oil - borne preservatives shall be kiln - dried before treatment to an average moisture content of 12 percent to 15 percent per AWPA standards unless specified otherwise.
B. Wood treated with water - borne preservatives (with the exception of SBX treated wood) shall be air dried or kiln - dried before treatment to a n average moisture content of 28 percent or less per AWPA standards. Wood having moisture content higher than 28 percent is acceptable when treating SBX materials.
C. Wood shall be treated as noted below.
D. Lumber shall be milled to finish size and shape prior to treating, and shall be treated before assembly. Plywood may be treated in regular panel sizes.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Water - Borne Preservatives: Water - Borne Preservatives shall be Preserve ACQ, Preserve Plus ACQ, Wolman ECBA, Hi - Bor SBX, and Timber Saver PT SBX, or pre - approved equal, except as stipulated otherwise in accordance with American Wood Preservers Association (AWPA) Standard P5 - "Standards for Waterborne Preservatives", and permitted by EPA. Preservatives shall be EPA registered (Hawaii use only treatment is not acceptable)
Preservative Treated Lumber 06311-2 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
1. Treatment for ACQ and CBA treated wood shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. Preservatives shall be EPA registered.
2. Water - Borne Preservatives used to coat end cuts and penetrations in SBX treated wood shall be Clear - Bor F.T. or pre - approved equal solution of 10 percent inorganic boron. The end coating solution must be approved and labeled by the Environmental Protection Agency and must be accepted by the State of Hawaii, Department of Agriculture, Pesticides Branch, for this purpose. The treatment solution shall have a colorant added which will tint the wood surface to indicate treatment where wood will be unexposed. The contractor shall be held responsible for all bleed through of dye.
B. Oil - Borne Preservatives: Oil - Borne Preservatives shall be TRIB II Type B, Permethrin/IPBC (3 - iodo - 2 propynyl butyl carbonate) in a base solution of mineral spirits, manufactured to the manufacture’s quality control and EPA registered, or pre - approved equal. The solvent used in formulating the preservative solution shall meet the requirements of AWPA standard P9 - application use low odor mineral spirits as the solvent.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 WOOD PRESERVATION WITH WATER - BORNE PRESERVATIVES
A. Unless otherwise stipulated, all lumber and plywood shall be pressure treated.
B. Lumber and plywood, except as stipulated in items entitled "WOOD PRESERVATION BY PRESSURE TREATMENT WITH OIL - BORNE PRESERVATIVES" and "WOOD PRESERVATIONS BY DIP TREATMENT" hereinbelow, shall be treated with ACQ and CBA materials as specified and in accordance with American Wood Preservers Association (AWPA) Standards CS - "Lumber, Timbers, Bridge Ties and Mine Ties - Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process", C9 - "Plywood Preservative Treatment by Pressure Processes", and C15 - "Wood for Commercial - Residential Construction", SBX material, using the full cell pressure method in conformance with AWPA Standard C1 - "All Timber Products - Preservative Treatment by Pressure Processes", or C31, "Lumber Use Out of Contact with the Ground and Continuously - Protected from Liquid Water - Treatment by Pressure Processes". Lumber and plywood treated with SBX shall attain the following penetration and retention requirements:
1. LUMBER:
a. Penetration Requirement for Lumber Under 5 - inch Nominal thickness: 0.40 - inch in in heartwood and 90 percent in sapwood.
b. Penetration Requirement for Lumber 5 - inch Nominal Thickness and Over: 0.50 - inch in heartwood and 90 percent in sapwood
Preservative Treated Lumber 06311-3 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
c. Retention requirement for lumber shall be a minimum of 1.5 percent weight/weight or 0.42 pound per cubic foot in an assay zone of 0.0 - 0.6 inch for lumber under 5 - inches nominal thickness and 0.0 - .075 inch for lumber over 5 - inches in nominal thickness.
2. Plywood:
a. Penetration requirement for plywood shall be identical to that noted in AWPA Standard C9.
b. Retention requirement for plywood shall be a minimum of 1.27 percent weight/weigh or 0.40 pound per cubic foot through the full thickness.
C. Lumber 2 - inches or less in thickness and all plywood shall be dried to a moisture content of 19 percent or less after treatment.
3.02 WOOD PRESERVATION BY PRESSURE TREATMENT WITH OIL - BORNE PRESERVATIVES
A. Exposed lumber 1 - 1/2 inch (net thickness) and over shall be incised and pressure treated in accordance with the process specifications noted in the latest edition of AWPA Standards C1, C2, and C9.
B. Wood shall be kiln - dried to an average moisture content of 12 to 15 percent per AWPA Standards prior to treatment.
C. Treated wood shall attain the following net retention requirements: 0.052 pound of dry ingredient per cubic foot of treated wood.
D. Lumber and plywood shall be thoroughly dried and virtually odor - free prior to installation.
3.03 WOOD PRESERVATION BY DIP TREATMENT
A. Finish lumber under 1 - 1/2 inch net thickness; finish plywood; and mill work items, such as for cabinet work, shelving, and similar wood work that will be exposed t6o view in the finished work shall be immersion treated for minimum period of 15 minutes in any of the preservatives listed in paragraph entitled "Oil - Borne Preservatives" hereinabove or in accordance with the requirements of the Window and Door Manufacturers Association (WDMA) Industry Standard I.S. 4, "Water - Repellent Preservation Non –Pressure Treatment of Millwork" or in a solution of 1 quart Permethrin in 55 gallons of a b=0.50 percent IPBC solution.
B. Lumber and plywood shall be thoroughly dried and virtually odor - free prior to installation.
3.04 INSTALLATION
A. Wherever it is necessary to end out cut or penetrate into (such as by drilling or
Preservative Treated Lumber 06311-4 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
notching) treated wood on the job, all such cuts and penetrations shall be treated in accordance with AWPA Standard M4, "Care of Preservative Treated Wood Products", or in accordance with the approved preservative manufacturer’s ICC Evaluation Services report requirements, using two heavy brush coats of a treating solution as recommended by the manufacturer. Where allowed by preservative manufacturer, spray cut ends and bored holes with "Hudson Bay type sprayer, 2 coat. Exception: Cuts and penetrations made in SBX treated wood 2 - inches or less in nominal thickness need not be filed treated.
B. SBX treated wood shall not be used in areas exposed to direct precipitation (e.g. exposed decking, trellises, fencing, etc.) unless painted or covered with a finishing material.
C. Workers, in the field or in applicable millwork shops, shall read and follow all instruction and recommendations of the preservative treatment manufacturer and wood treatment applicator.
D. Wood for use in renovation shall be thoroughly dried (minimum 10 days air drying) or shall be virtually odor free prior installation.
3.05 CLEAN UP
Depose of treated wood in sanitary landfill or other authorized disposal area. Do not burn treated wood.
END OF SECTION
Preservative Treated Lumber 06311-5 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL MOISTURE PROTECTION
SECTION 07130 - MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
As specified in SECTION 01019 - GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Prefabricated, self-adhering sheet - type waterproofing membrane. Tough, multi - layer, cross - laminated film coated with a rubberized asphalt adhesive for use in sub -grade applications.
B. Related Work Specified in Other Sections:
1. SECTION 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.
2. SECTION 04220 - CONCRETE unit Masonry.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of SECTION 01300 - SUBMITTALS.
B. Manufacturer’s Data: Submit manufacturer’s specifications and installation instructions. Included data substantiating that materials comply with specified requirements.
C. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS): Submit MSDS for each material.
D. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings including details of construction and relationship with adjacent construction.
E. Warranty: Submit warranty as stipulated in item entitled "WARRANTY" hereinbelow.
F. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum size 3 inches (75 mm) x 4 inches (100 mm), representing actual product, color, and patterns.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Installer Qualifications: Experienced in installation of specified material type with working knowledge of specified products and Project specific application requirements.
Membrane Waterproofing 07130-1 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Delivery: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers and packaging, with labels clearly identifying product name and manufacturer.
B. Storage: Store materials in clean, dry, heated area indoors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Store cartons on end and protect from moisture and damage. Protect from temperatures above 100 degrees F (38 degrees C). Do not remove rolls from cartons until application.
1.06 WARRANTY
Manufacturer warrants materials to be free from leaks caused by defects in material or manufacturing for a period of 10 years from the date of purchase when applied according to published directions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Material Thickness: Complies with ASTM D 197.
B. Pliability: Complies with ICC-ES AC 38.
C. Vapor Permeance: Complies with ASTM E 96, 0.02 g/m2 Maximum.
D. Water Resistance: Complies with ASTM D 779 for greater than 30 hours.
E. Nail Sealability: Complies with ASTM D 1970.
F. Tensile MD: Complies with ASTM D 882 at 21 lbf/in2 (0.02 ksi).
G. Tensile CMD: Complies with ASTM D 882 at 28 lbf/in2 (0.03 ksi).
2.02 MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING
A. Prefabricated, self-adhering sheet - type waterproofing membrane. Tough, multi - layer, cross - laminated film coated with a rubberized asphalt adhesive for use in sub -grade applications.
1. Manufacturer: MFM Building Products Corp.; 525 Orange St., Coshocton, OH 43812. ASD. Toll Free Tel: (800) 882-7663. Tel: (740) 622-2645. Fax: (740) 622-6161. Web: http://www.mfmbp.com. or Pre - Approved Equal.
2. Description: Prefabricated, 40 mil (1 mm) multi-layer sheet -type high strength polymer film that is coated with a layer of specially formulated rubberized asphalt self - adhesive waterproofing membrane.
Membrane Waterproofing 07130-2 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
3. Material Color: Black.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Adhesive: As supplied by manufacturer.
B. Primer: Asphalt - based commercial primer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION
A. Inspect and prepare substrates using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving best result for the substrates under project conditions.
B. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. Do not proceed with installation until substrates have been prepared using the methods recommended by the manufacturer and deviations from manufacturer’s recommended tolerances are corrected. Commencement of installation constitutes acceptance of conditions.
C. If preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Engineer in writing of deviations from manufacturer’s recommended installation tolerances and conditions.
3.02 INSTALLATION
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Apply in clear, dry weather on clean, dry and free from oil surface. Masonry must be clean, fully cured and primed with an asphalt primer. Use 3 inches (76 mm) side laps and 6 inches (152 mm) head laps and apply uniform pressure with a 2 to 3 inches (51 to 76 mm) hand roller to entire surface. Do not install over solvent-based sealants unless fully cured - active solvents may liquefy bottom adhesive surface. Do not expose installed product to direct sunlight for more than 90 days.
3.03 PROTECTION
Protect installed products until completion of project. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
Membrane Waterproofing 07130-3 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
SECTION 07410 - PREFORMED METAL STANDING SEAM ROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
As specified in Section 01019 - GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Snap joint-seamed, standing seam metal roof panels, with related metal trim and accessories
B. Related Work Specified In Other Sections:
1. SECTION 06200 - FINISH CARPENTRY.
2. SECTION 07110 - MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING.
3. SECTION 07210 - BUILDING INSULATION.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of SECTION 01300 - SUBMITTALS.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings to Engineer showing layouts of metal panels. Include details of each condition of installation, panel profiles, and attachment to building. Provide details at a minimum scale 3/4-inch per foot showing edge conditions, joints, fastener and sealant placement, flashings, openings, penetrations, roof accessories, lightning arresting equipment, and special details. Make distinctions between factory and field assembled work, location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large scale details, attachment devices and other components. Submit shop drawings for wood deck framing and decking, including solid wood ramps.
1. Indicate points of supporting structure that must coordinate with metal panel system installation.
2. Include data indicating compliance with performance requirements.
3. Include structural data indicating compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction
C. Samples: For each exposed product specified including sealants. Provide representative color charts of manufacturer's full range of colors.
D. Warranty: Submit warranty as stipulated in item entitled "WARRANTY" hereinbelow.
Preformed Metal Standing Seam Roof 07410-1 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
E. Closeout Submittals: Maintenance data and executed copy of manufacturer's standard warranty.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer/Source: Provide metal roof panel assembly and accessories from a single manufacturer providing fixed and portable based roll forming.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Approved manufacturer listed in this Section with minimum five years of experience in manufacture of similar products in successful use in similar applications.
C. Installer Qualifications: Experienced Installer with minimum of five years of experience with successfully completed projects of a similar nature and scope. Experienced mechanic supervising work on site whenever work is underway.
1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Protect products of metal panel system during shipping, handling, and storage to prevent staining, denting, deterioration of components or other damage. Protect panels and trim bundles during shipping.
1. Deliver, unload, store, and erect metal panel system and accessory items without misshaping panels or exposing panels to surface damage from weather or construction operations.
2. Store in accordance with Manufacturer's written instructions. Provide wood collars for stacking and handling in the field.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. The Contractor shall furnish to the State a written warranty on the Manufacturer’s standard form, in which Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace metal panels that evidence deterioration of factory-applied finish within 25 years from date of Substantial Completion, including Kynar 500 Duranar fluoropolymer Two - Coat System for color fading in excess of 5 Hunter units per ASTM D 2244, chalking in excess of No. 8 rating per ASTM D 4214 and failure of adhesion, peeling, checking, or cracking.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Provide metal panel assemblies capable of withstanding the effects of indicated loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:
1. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on uniform pressure, importance factor, exposure category, and basic wind speed of 105 MPH.,wind
Preformed Metal Standing Seam Roof 07410-2 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
exposure B.
2. Wind Uplift Testing: Certify capacity of metal panels by actual testing of proposed assembly per ASTM E 1592.
C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from variations in both ambient and internal temperatures. Accommodate movement of support structure caused by thermal expansion and contraction. Allow for deflection and design for thermal stresses caused by temperature differences from one side of the panel to the other.
D. Thermal Performance:
1. Solar Reflectance Index (SRI): SRI aged value greater than or equal to 32.
2. Emissivity: Greater than or equal to 0.75.
2.02 METAL ROOF PANELS
A. Interlocking, Concealed Fastener, Metal Roof Panels: Structural metal roof panel consisting of formed metal sheet with vertical ribs at panel edges, installed by lapping and mechanically interlocking edges of adjacent panels, and attaching panels to supports using concealed clips and fasteners in a weathertight installation.
1. Manufacturer: Kloeckner Metals or pre-approved equal.
2. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792/A 792M, structural quality, Grade CS, Coating Class AZ55, pre - painted by the coil-coating process per ASTM A 755/A 755M.
3. Nominal Coated Thickness: 24 gage (0.0236 inch).
4. Panel Surface: Smooth.
5. Exterior Finish: Fluoropolymer Two-Coat System. 0.2 - 0.3 mil primer with 0.7 - 0.8 mil 70 percent PVDF fluoropolymer color coat, AAMA 621
6. Interior Finish: 1.0 mil total dry film thickness consisting of primer coat and wash coat of manufacturer's standard light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish.
7. Color: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's standard colors.
8. Panel Width: 12 inches.
9. Panel Seam Height: 1.75 inches.
10. Joint Type: Snap joint-seamed.
Preformed Metal Standing Seam Roof 07410-3 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
B. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Underlayment: Self-Adhesive Underlayment High Temperature, 45 Mils (1.14 mm) nominal thickness, non-slip, cross - laminated polymer film laminated to a high temperature rubberized asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing. Provide primer when recommended by underlayment manufacturer for substrate.
2.02 METAL ROOF PANEL ACCESSORIES
A. General: Provide complete metal roof panel assembly incorporating trim, copings, fascia, gutters and downspouts, and miscellaneous flashings, in manufacturer's standard profiles. Provide required fasteners, closure strips, thermal spacers, splice plates, support plates, and sealants as indicated in manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Flashing and Trim: Match material, thickness, and finish of metal panel face sheet.
C. Panel Clips: ASTM C 645, with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 hot-dip galvanized zinc coating, configured for concealment in panel joints, and identical to clips utilized in tests demonstrating compliance with performance requirements.
D. Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws and other acceptable corrosion-resistant fasteners recommended by roof panel manufacturer. Where exposed fasteners cannot be avoided, supply ZAC® fasteners with EPDM or neoprene gaskets, with heads matching color of metal panels by means of factory-applied coating.
E. Joint Sealers: Manufacturer's standard or recommended liquid and preformed sealers and tapes, and as follows:
1. Factory-Applied Seam Sealant: Manufacturer's standard hot-melt type.
2. Tape Sealers: Manufacturer's standard non-curing butyl tape, AAMA 809.2.
3. Concealed Joint Sealant: Non-curing butyl, AAMA 809.2.
F. Steel Sheet Miscellaneous Framing Components: ASTM C 645, with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 hot-dip galvanized zinc coating.
2.03 FABRICATION
A. General: Provide factory fabricated and finished metal panels and accessories meeting performance requirements, indicated profiles, and structural requirements.
B. Form panels in continuous lengths for full length of detailed runs, except where otherwise indicated on approved shop drawings.
C. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with manufacturer's written instructions, approved shop drawings, and project
Preformed Metal Standing Seam Roof 07410-4 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
drawings. Form from materials matching metal panel substrate and finish.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine metal panel system substrate and supports with Installer present. Inspect for erection tolerances and other conditions that would adversely affect installation of metal panel installation.
1. Inspect metal panel support substrate to determine if support components are installed as indicated on approved shop drawings. Confirm presence of acceptable supports at recommended spacing to match installation requirements of metal panels.
2. Panel Support Tolerances: Panel supports are within tolerances acceptable to metal panel system manufacturer but not greater than 3/8 inch (9 mm) over any single roof plane.
B. Correct out-of-tolerance work and other deficient conditions prior to proceeding with MAC 175 SSMRS installation.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Apply in accordance with underlayment manufacturer's written instructions; apply primer if required. Apply over the entire roof surface. Roll laps with roller.
B. Felt Underlayment: Apply over the entire roof surface, in accordance with underlayment manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Flashings: Provide flashings as required to complete metal roof panel system. Install in accordance with Section 07600 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim and approved shop drawings.
3.03 METAL PANEL INSTALLATION
A. Snap-Joint-Seamed, Standing Seam Metal Roof Panels: Install weathertight metal panel system in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, approved shop drawings, and project drawings. Install metal roof panels in orientation, sizes, and locations indicated, free of waves, warps, buckles, fastening stresses, and distortions. Anchor panels and other components securely in place. Provide for thermal and structural movement.
B. Attach panels to supports using clips, screws, fasteners, and sealants recommended by manufacturer and indicated on approved shop drawings.
1. Fasten metal panels to supports with concealed clips at each location indicated on approved shop drawings, with spacing and fasteners
Preformed Metal Standing Seam Roof 07410-5 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
recommended by manufacturer.
2. Snap Joint: Nest standing seams and fasten together by interlocking and completely engaging seams.
3. Provide weatherproof jacks for pipe and conduit penetrating metal panels of types recommended by manufacturer.
4. Dissimilar Materials: Where elements of metal panel system will come into contact with dissimilar materials, treat faces and edges in contact with dissimilar materials as recommended by manufacturer.
3.04 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
A. General: Install metal panel trim, flashing, and accessories using recommended fasteners and joint sealers, with positive anchorage to building, and with weather tight mounting. Provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components.
1. Install components required for a complete metal panel assembly, including trim, copings, flashings, sealants, closure strips, and similar items.
2. Comply with details of assemblies utilized to establish compliance with performance requirements and manufacturer's written installation instructions.
3. Provide concealed fasteners except where noted on approved shop drawings.
4. Set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently weather resistant.
B. Joint Sealers: Install joint sealers where indicated and where required for weathertight performance of metal panel assemblies, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Prepare joints and apply sealants per requirements of SECTION 07920 - SEALANTS.
3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Remove any debris, filings, and other foreign objects from roof. Clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer.
B. Replace damaged panels and accessories that cannot be repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
END OF SECTION
Preformed Metal Standing Seam Roof 07410-6 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
SECTION 07410 - PREFORMED METAL STANDING SEAM ROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
As specified in Section 01019 - GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Snap joint-seamed, standing seam metal roof panels, with related metal trim and accessories
B. Related Work Specified In Other Sections:
1. SECTION 06200 - FINISH CARPENTRY.
2. SECTION 07110 - MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING.
3. SECTION 07210 - BUILDING INSULATION.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of SECTION 01300 - SUBMITTALS.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings to Engineer showing layouts of metal panels. Include details of each condition of installation, panel profiles, and attachment to building. Provide details at a minimum scale 3/4-inch per foot showing edge conditions, joints, fastener and sealant placement, flashings, openings, penetrations, roof accessories, lightning arresting equipment, and special details. Make distinctions between factory and field assembled work, location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large scale details, attachment devices and other components. Submit shop drawings for wood deck framing and decking, including solid wood ramps.
1. Indicate points of supporting structure that must coordinate with metal panel system installation.
2. Include data indicating compliance with performance requirements.
3. Include structural data indicating compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction
C. Samples: For each exposed product specified including sealants. Provide representative color charts of manufacturer's full range of colors.
D. Warranty: Submit warranty as stipulated in item entitled "WARRANTY" hereinbelow.
Preformed Metal Standing Seam Roof 07410-1 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
E. Closeout Submittals: Maintenance data and executed copy of manufacturer's standard warranty.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer/Source: Provide metal roof panel assembly and accessories from a single manufacturer providing fixed and portable based roll forming.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Approved manufacturer listed in this Section with minimum five years of experience in manufacture of similar products in successful use in similar applications.
C. Installer Qualifications: Experienced Installer with minimum of five years of experience with successfully completed projects of a similar nature and scope. Experienced mechanic supervising work on site whenever work is underway.
1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Protect products of metal panel system during shipping, handling, and storage to prevent staining, denting, deterioration of components or other damage. Protect panels and trim bundles during shipping.
1. Deliver, unload, store, and erect metal panel system and accessory items without misshaping panels or exposing panels to surface damage from weather or construction operations.
2. Store in accordance with Manufacturer's written instructions. Provide wood collars for stacking and handling in the field.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. The Contractor shall furnish to the State a written warranty on the Manufacturer’s standard form, in which Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace metal panels that evidence deterioration of factory-applied finish within 25 years from date of Substantial Completion, including Kynar 500 Duranar fluoropolymer Two - Coat System for color fading in excess of 5 Hunter units per ASTM D 2244, chalking in excess of No. 8 rating per ASTM D 4214 and failure of adhesion, peeling, checking, or cracking.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Provide metal panel assemblies capable of withstanding the effects of indicated loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:
1. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on uniform pressure, importance factor, exposure category, and basic wind speed of 105 MPH.,wind
Preformed Metal Standing Seam Roof 07410-2 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
exposure B.
2. Wind Uplift Testing: Certify capacity of metal panels by actual testing of proposed assembly per ASTM E 1592.
C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from variations in both ambient and internal temperatures. Accommodate movement of support structure caused by thermal expansion and contraction. Allow for deflection and design for thermal stresses caused by temperature differences from one side of the panel to the other.
D. Thermal Performance:
1. Solar Reflectance Index (SRI): SRI aged value greater than or equal to 32.
2. Emissivity: Greater than or equal to 0.75.
2.02 METAL ROOF PANELS
A. Interlocking, Concealed Fastener, Metal Roof Panels: Structural metal roof panel consisting of formed metal sheet with vertical ribs at panel edges, installed by lapping and mechanically interlocking edges of adjacent panels, and attaching panels to supports using concealed clips and fasteners in a weathertight installation.
1. Manufacturer: Kloeckner Metals or pre-approved equal.
2. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792/A 792M, structural quality, Grade CS, Coating Class AZ55, pre - painted by the coil-coating process per ASTM A 755/A 755M.
3. Nominal Coated Thickness: 24 gage (0.0236 inch).
4. Panel Surface: Smooth.
5. Exterior Finish: Fluoropolymer Two-Coat System. 0.2 - 0.3 mil primer with 0.7 - 0.8 mil 70 percent PVDF fluoropolymer color coat, AAMA 621
6. Interior Finish: 1.0 mil total dry film thickness consisting of primer coat and wash coat of manufacturer's standard light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish.
7. Color: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's standard colors.
8. Panel Width: 12 inches.
9. Panel Seam Height: 1.75 inches.
10. Joint Type: Snap joint-seamed.
Preformed Metal Standing Seam Roof 07410-3 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
B. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Underlayment: Self-Adhesive Underlayment High Temperature, 45 Mils (1.14 mm) nominal thickness, non-slip, cross - laminated polymer film laminated to a high temperature rubberized asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing. Provide primer when recommended by underlayment manufacturer for substrate.
2.02 METAL ROOF PANEL ACCESSORIES
A. General: Provide complete metal roof panel assembly incorporating trim, copings, fascia, gutters and downspouts, and miscellaneous flashings, in manufacturer's standard profiles. Provide required fasteners, closure strips, thermal spacers, splice plates, support plates, and sealants as indicated in manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Flashing and Trim: Match material, thickness, and finish of metal panel face sheet.
C. Panel Clips: ASTM C 645, with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 hot-dip galvanized zinc coating, configured for concealment in panel joints, and identical to clips utilized in tests demonstrating compliance with performance requirements.
D. Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws and other acceptable corrosion-resistant fasteners recommended by roof panel manufacturer. Where exposed fasteners cannot be avoided, supply ZAC® fasteners with EPDM or neoprene gaskets, with heads matching color of metal panels by means of factory-applied coating.
E. Joint Sealers: Manufacturer's standard or recommended liquid and preformed sealers and tapes, and as follows:
1. Factory-Applied Seam Sealant: Manufacturer's standard hot-melt type.
2. Tape Sealers: Manufacturer's standard non-curing butyl tape, AAMA 809.2.
3. Concealed Joint Sealant: Non-curing butyl, AAMA 809.2.
F. Steel Sheet Miscellaneous Framing Components: ASTM C 645, with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 hot-dip galvanized zinc coating.
2.03 FABRICATION
A. General: Provide factory fabricated and finished metal panels and accessories meeting performance requirements, indicated profiles, and structural requirements.
B. Form panels in continuous lengths for full length of detailed runs, except where otherwise indicated on approved shop drawings.
C. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with manufacturer's written instructions, approved shop drawings, and project
Preformed Metal Standing Seam Roof 07410-4 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
drawings. Form from materials matching metal panel substrate and finish.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine metal panel system substrate and supports with Installer present. Inspect for erection tolerances and other conditions that would adversely affect installation of metal panel installation.
1. Inspect metal panel support substrate to determine if support components are installed as indicated on approved shop drawings. Confirm presence of acceptable supports at recommended spacing to match installation requirements of metal panels.
2. Panel Support Tolerances: Panel supports are within tolerances acceptable to metal panel system manufacturer but not greater than 3/8 inch (9 mm) over any single roof plane.
B. Correct out-of-tolerance work and other deficient conditions prior to proceeding with MAC 175 SSMRS installation.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Apply in accordance with underlayment manufacturer's written instructions; apply primer if required. Apply over the entire roof surface. Roll laps with roller.
B. Felt Underlayment: Apply over the entire roof surface, in accordance with underlayment manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Flashings: Provide flashings as required to complete metal roof panel system. Install in accordance with Section 07600 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim and approved shop drawings.
3.03 METAL PANEL INSTALLATION
A. Snap-Joint-Seamed, Standing Seam Metal Roof Panels: Install weathertight metal panel system in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, approved shop drawings, and project drawings. Install metal roof panels in orientation, sizes, and locations indicated, free of waves, warps, buckles, fastening stresses, and distortions. Anchor panels and other components securely in place. Provide for thermal and structural movement.
B. Attach panels to supports using clips, screws, fasteners, and sealants recommended by manufacturer and indicated on approved shop drawings.
1. Fasten metal panels to supports with concealed clips at each location indicated on approved shop drawings, with spacing and fasteners
Preformed Metal Standing Seam Roof 07410-5 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
recommended by manufacturer.
2. Snap Joint: Nest standing seams and fasten together by interlocking and completely engaging seams.
3. Provide weatherproof jacks for pipe and conduit penetrating metal panels of types recommended by manufacturer.
4. Dissimilar Materials: Where elements of metal panel system will come into contact with dissimilar materials, treat faces and edges in contact with dissimilar materials as recommended by manufacturer.
3.04 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
A. General: Install metal panel trim, flashing, and accessories using recommended fasteners and joint sealers, with positive anchorage to building, and with weather tight mounting. Provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components.
1. Install components required for a complete metal panel assembly, including trim, copings, flashings, sealants, closure strips, and similar items.
2. Comply with details of assemblies utilized to establish compliance with performance requirements and manufacturer's written installation instructions.
3. Provide concealed fasteners except where noted on approved shop drawings.
4. Set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently weather resistant.
B. Joint Sealers: Install joint sealers where indicated and where required for weathertight performance of metal panel assemblies, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Prepare joints and apply sealants per requirements of SECTION 07920 - SEALANTS.
3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Remove any debris, filings, and other foreign objects from roof. Clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer.
B. Replace damaged panels and accessories that cannot be repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
END OF SECTION
Preformed Metal Standing Seam Roof 07410-6 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
SECTION 07411 - PREFORMED METAL WALL PANEL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
As specified in Section 01019 - GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Snap joint-seamed, standing seam metal roof panels, with related metal trim and accessories
B. Related Work Specified In Other Sections:
1. SECTION 06200 - FINISH CARPENTRY
2. SECTION 07110 - MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of SECTION 01300 - SUBMITTALS.
B. Submit Manufacturer’s technical product data, installation instructions and recommendations for each type of roofing and wall panel required. Include data substantiating that materials comply with requirements.
C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings to Engineer showing layouts of metal panels. Include details of each condition of installation, panel profiles, and attachment to building. Provide details at a minimum scale 3/4-inch per foot showing edge conditions, joints, fastener and sealant placement, flashings, openings, penetrations, and special details. Make distinctions between factory and field assembled work, location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large scale details, attachment devices and other components. Submit shop drawings for wood deck framing and decking, including solid wood ramps.
1. Indicate points of supporting structure that must coordinate with metal panel system installation.
2. Include data indicating compliance with performance requirements.
3. Include structural data indicating compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Samples: For each exposed product specified including sealants. Provide representative color charts of manufacturer's full range of colors.
E. Warranty: Submit warranty as stipulated in item entitled "WARRANTY" hereinbelow.
Preformed Metal Wall Panel 07411-1 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
F. Closeout Submittals: Maintenance data and executed copy of manufacturer's standard warranty.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer/Source: Provide meta wall panel assembly and accessories from a single manufacturer providing fixed and portable based roll forming.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Approved manufacturer listed in this Section with minimum five years of experience in manufacture of similar products in successful use in similar applications.
C. Installer Qualifications: Experienced Installer with minimum of five years of experience with successfully completed projects of a similar nature and scope. Experienced mechanic supervising work on site whenever work is underway.
1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Protect products of metal panel system during shipping, handling, and storage to prevent staining, denting, deterioration of components or other damage. Protect panels and trim bundles during shipping.
1. Deliver, unload, store, and erect metal panel system and accessory items without misshaping panels or exposing panels to surface damage from weather or construction operations.
2. Store in accordance with Manufacturer's written instructions. Provide wood collars for stacking and handling in the field.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. The Contractor shall furnish to the State a written warranty on the Manufacturer’s standard form, in which Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace metal panels that evidence deterioration of factory-applied finish within 20 year.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 METAL WALL PANELS
A. Metal Wall Panel: J-Rib, net coverage 36 inches, rib depth 1-1/8 inches at 12 inches on center.
1. Manufacturer: Kloeckner Metals or pre-approved equal.
2. Steel conforming to ASTM A792 Zincalume/Galvalume, minimum yield 30,000 psi. 3. Nominal Coated Thickness: 24 gage (0.0236 inch).
Preformed Metal Wall Panel 07411-2 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
4. Protective Coating: Conform to ASTM A792, AZ55.
5. Exterior Finish: Duranar, full 70% Kynar 500/Hylar 5000 consisting of a baked-on 0.20 mil corrosion resistant primer and a baked-on 0.80 mil finish coat with a specular gloss of 25-35 percent at 60 degrees. when tested in accordance with ASTM D-523. Includes Zincalume Plus protective coating.
6. Interior Finish: Corrosion-resistant primer, primer coat dry film thickness: of 0.20 mils; polyester paint, finish coat material: finish coat dry film thickness: of 0.80 mils.
7. Color: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's standard colors.
8. Rib Spacing: 12 inches.
9. Rib Depth: 1.125 inches.
2.02 FABRICATION
A. General: Unless otherwise shown on drawings or specified herein, panels shall be full length. Fabricate flashings and accessories in longest practical lengths.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine metal wall panel system substrate and supports with Installer present. Inspect for erection tolerances and other conditions that would adversely affect installation of metal panel installation.
1. Inspect metal wall panel support substrate to determine if support components are installed as indicated on approved shop drawings. Confirm presence of acceptable supports at recommended spacing to match installation requirements of metal panels.
2. Panel Support Tolerances: Panel supports are within tolerances acceptable to metal panel system manufacturer but not greater than 1/4 inch in 40 feet.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Apply in accordance with underlayment manufacturer's written instructions; apply primer if required. Apply over the entire roof surface. Roll laps with roller.
B. Felt Underlayment: Apply over the entire roof surface, in accordance with underlayment manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Flashings: Provide flashings as required to complete metal wall panel system. Install in accordance with Section 07600 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim and
Preformed Metal Wall Panel 07411-3 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
approved shop drawings.
3.03 METAL WALL PANEL INSTALLATION
A. Snap-Joint-Seamed, Standing Seam Metal Roof Panels: Install weathertight metal wall panel system in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, approved shop drawings, and project drawings. Install metal wall panels in vertically orientation, sizes, and locations indicated, free of waves, warps, buckles, fastening stresses, and distortions. Anchor panels and other components securely in place. Provide for thermal and structural movement. Lap panels away from prevailing wind direction and do not stretch or compress panel side-laps.
3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Remove any debris, filings, and other foreign objects from roof. Clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer.
B. Replace damaged panels and accessories that cannot be repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
END OF SECTION
Preformed Metal Wall Panel 07411-4 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
SECTION 07600 - FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
As specified in Section 01019 - GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Furnishing and installing of flashing and sheet metal.
B. Related Work Specified In Other Sections:
1. SECTION 07920 - SEALANTS.
2. SECTION 07410 - PREFORMED METAL STANDING SEAM ROOFING.
3. SECTION 07411 - PREFORMED METAL WALL PANEL.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of SECTION 01300 - SUBMITTALS.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings of gutters, downspouts, flashings and other sheet metal work for approval.
C. Warranty: Submit warranty as stipulated in item entitled "WARRANTY" hereinbelow.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store sheet metal flashing and trim materials away from uncured concrete and masonry.
B. Protect strippable protective covering on sheet metal flashing and trim from exposure to sunlight and high humidity, except to extent necessary for period of sheet metal flashing and trim installation.
1.05 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace sheet metal flashing and trim that shows evidence of deterioration of factory- applied finishes within specified warranty period.
1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:
Flashing and Sheet Metal 07600-1 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214.
c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.
2. Finish Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 Materials
A. Prefinished Metal: Provide materials from the same source, materials, and finish as metal roofing provided under SECTION 07410 - PREFORMED METAL STANDING SEAM ROOFING.
B. Nails and Fasteners: Use the same metal or a metal compatible with the item. Use stainless steel fasteners to fasten dissimilar metals.
C. Stainless Steel Wire Cloth Strainers: Maximum 1/2 inch mesh, 0.063-inch diameter wire for downspout connector head covers at gutter, formed as shown and removable.
D. Splash block: Splash block of 12 inch wide x 16 inch long x 4 inch deep size shall be formed with depression in top surface to drain away from building and shall be reinforced as standard with the manufacturer.
E. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC-Paint 12 but containing no asbestos fibers, or cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION AND WORKMANSHIP
A. Surfaces to receive sheet metal must be plumb and true, clean, even, smooth, dry and free from defects and projections which might affect the application. Installation of items not shown in detail or not covered by specifications shall meet the applicable requirements of the SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, and the NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual. In absence of such a report, the Contractor shall be held responsible for the finished product.
B. All accessories or the other items essential for the completeness of the sheet metal installation, though not specifically indicated on the drawings or specififed, shall be provided. All such items unless otherwise indicated on the draiwngs or specified, shall be of the same kind of materials as the item to be applied. Nails,
Flashing and Sheet Metal 07600-2 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
screws, rivets, and bolts shall be of the type best suited for the purpose intended and shall be of a composition that is compatible with the metal to which it will contact.
C. Except as otherwise indicated on the drawings or specified, the workmanship of sheet metal work, method of forming joints, anchoring, cleating, provisions for expansion, etc. shall conform to the standards details and recommendations of the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual," and shall be subject to the acceptance of the Engineer. Exposed edges shall be folded back neatly to form a minimum 1/2 inch hem on the concealed side. Fabricate for waterproof and weather resistant performance with expansion provisions for running work, sufficient to permanently prevent leakage, damage, or deterioration of the work.
D. Gutters: Provide cross sectional area not less than the area of gutter indicated and complete with mitered corners, end pieces, and special pieces that may be required. Form gutters in section not less than 8 feet in length. Join ends of each length with one-inch flat locked, riveted, and sealed joints. Expansion type slip joints shall be provided at the center of the runs and at intervals of not more than 40 feet. Provide hanger of an approved type, spaced not to exceed 30 inches on center. Form hangers and fastenings from a metal compatible with the gutters. Gutter downspout transition shall be fabricated from the same material as gutter. Provide filter screen as indicated.
E. Downspout Leader: Provide cross sectional area not less than the size indicated and complete, including elbow and offsets. Provide downspout in approximately 10 foot lengths; end joints shall telescope not less than 1/2 inch, and longitudinal joints shall be locked. Provide gutter outlets with stainless steel wire ball strainers of the standard type. Position downspouts not less than 1.2 away from walls and fasten to the walls at top, bottom, and at not to exceed 5 feet from center immediately between with manufacturer's standard type leader straps, or concealed type fasteners. Form straps and fasteners form a metal compatible with the downspout.
F. Seams: Straight and uniform in width and height with no sealant showing on the face.
1. Flat-Lock Seams: Finish not less than 3/4 inch wide.
2. Lap Seams: Finish soldered seams not less than one inch width. Overlap seams not soldered, not less than 3 inches.
3. Loose-Lock Expansion Seams: Not less than 3 inches wide and shall provide minimum one-inch movement within the joint. Joint shall be completely filled with exterior sealant, applied at not less than 1/8 inch thick bed.
4. Flat Seams: Make seams in the direction of the flow.
G. All sheet metal work shall be watertight and wind-tight in compliance with the
Flashing and Sheet Metal 07600-3 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
purpose intended for the items indicated on the drawings or specified herein. Sheet metal shall be held firmly in place and shall not rattle.
H. Cleating: Cleats for sheet metal work shall be provided where required, continuous, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. Cleats shall be of the same material and weight as the metal being installed. Hook cleating with 3/4 inch minimum hem on concealed side of flashing.
I. Protection from Contact of Dissimilar Materials: Surface in contact with dissimilar metal shall be painted with heavy-bodied bituminous paint or shall be separated by means of moisture-proof building felts.
3.02 PROTECTION
Protect sheet metal work until final acceptance of building.
3.03 CLEAN UP
A. Clean exposed sheet metal work at completion of installation. Grease and oil films, handling marks, contamination from steel wool, fittings, and drilling debris shall be removed, and the work scrubbed clean. Exposed metal surfaces shall be free from dents, creases, waves, scratch marks, and solder or weld marks.
B. At completion of work, clean up and remove rubbish and debris from the premises which resulted from this work.
END OF SECTION
Flashing and Sheet Metal 07600-4 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
SECTION 07920 - SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
As specified in Section 01019 - GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Sealants and joint backing.
B. Related Work Specified in Other Sections:
1. DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION.
2. DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS.
3. SECTION 10200 - METAL WALL LOUVERS
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of SECTION 01300 - SUBMITTALS.
B. Product Data: Provide data indicating sealant chemical characteristics.
C. Material Safety Data Sheets: Submit MSDS of each sealant product.
D. Warranty: Submit warranty as stipulated in item entitled "WARRANTY" hereinbelow.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.
B. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized installer who is approved or licensed for installation of sealants required for this Project. Company specializing in performing the work of this section approved by manufacturer.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of sealant through one source from a single manufacturer.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver sealant to jobsite in sealed containers labeled to show the designated name, formula, or specification number, lot number, color, date of manufacture, shelf life, cure time, manufacturer's directions, and name of manufacturer.
Sealants 07920-1 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
B. Carefully handle and store materials to prevent inclusion of foreign materials. Remove from project site all damaged and deteriorated materials and materials exceeding shelf life.
C. All sealant materials shall be handled in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications and installed prior to expiration of shelf life.
1.06 WARRANTY
Include coverage for installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve airtight seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, cure time, cracks, or failures of installation and material.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. General: Provide sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacture, based on testing and field experience.
B. Sealants:
1. At Exterior and Interior Vertical and Overhead Moving Joints: One-part polyurethane; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses NT. Provide one of the following, or pre-approved equal.
a. Vulkem 116; Tremco, Inc. b. Chem-Calk 900; Bostick Construction Products Div. c. Sikaflex 1a; Sika Corp. d. DynaTrol 1-XL; Pecora Corp. e. NP-1; Sonneborn.
2. At Interior Vertical and Overhang Non-Moving Joints: Non-Elastomeric Sealant; acrylic-emulsion type, conforming to ASTM C 834. Provide one of the following, or pre-approved equal:
a. AC-20 Acrylic Latex; Pecora Corp. b. Tremco Acrylic Latex 834; Tremco, Inc. c. Chem-Calk 600; Bostick Construction Products Div. d. Sonolac; Sonneborn.
3. Horizontal Traffic Bearing Joints: One-part polyurethane based solvent, conforming to ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade P, except NS at sloped conditions, Class 25, Uses T. Provide one of the following, or pre-approved equal.
Sealants 07920-2 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
a. Sikaflex 1c SL or Sikaflex 1a; Sika Corp. b. Vulkem 45; Tremco, Inc. c. Urexpan NR-201; Pecora Corp. d. SL-1 or NP-1; Sonneborm.
4. At Perimeter of All Plumbing Fixtures and Fitting, Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses NT; single component,, non-sagging, non-staining, fungus resistant, non-bleeding; for use on interior joints with non-porous substrates.
5. Bedding Compound: For installation of thresholds and similar items indicated to be beaded in sealant, use a preformed butyl-polyisobutylene sealant tape. Size of tape as required for specific applications. Provide one of the following, or pre-approved equal:
a. Extru-Seal; Pecora Corp. b. 440 Tape; Tremco, Inc. c. Chem-Tape 40; Bostik Construction Products Div.
6. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C920, Grade NS, Class 12-1/2, Uses NT, M, A, G, O; single component, solvent release, non-skinning, non-sagging.
C. Primer for Sealants: Non-staining, as recommended by the sealant manufacturer.
D. Sealant Backer Rod: Compressible rod stock of polyethylene foam, polyethylene- jacketed polyurethane foam, butyl rubber foam, neoprene foam or other flexible, permanent, durable, nonabsorptive materials conforming with ASTM C 1330 as recommend for compatibility with sealant by the sealant manufacturer to control the joint depth for sealant placement, to break bond of sealant at bottom of joint, to form optimum shape of sealant back on back side, and to provide a highly compressible backer which will minimize the possibility of sealant extrusion when joint is compressed. Do not use oakum or other types of absorptive materials as backstops.
E. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape as recommended by sealant manufacturer. Provide self adhesive tape where required.
F. Masking Tape: Non-staining, nonabsorbent type compatible with joint sealants and to surfaces adjacent to joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
Comply with manufacturer's printed instructions except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified, and except where manufacturer's technical representative directs otherwise.
3.02 EXAMINATION
Sealants 07920-3 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work.
B. Examine joint widths, surfaces, and backing, and their anchorage to the structure, and conditions under which joint sealer work is to be preformed, and notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work and performance of sealers. Do no proceed with joint sealer work unit unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer.
C. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant.
3.03 JOINT PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealer to comply with recommendations of joint sealer manufacturers and the following requirements:
1. Remove all traces of previous sealant and joint backer by mechanical methods, such as by cutting, grinding, and wire brushing, in manner not damaging to surrounding surfaces.
2. Remove paints from joint surfaces except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer.
3. Remove wax, oil, grease, dirt film residues, temporary protective coatings, and other residues by wiping with cleaner recommended for that purpose. Use clean, white, lint-free cloths and change cloths frequently.
4. Remove dust by blowing clean with oil-free, compressed air.
5. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates which could interfere with adhesion of joint sealer, including dust; paints, except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer; oil; grease; waterproofing; water repellents; water; and surface dirt.
6. Clean concrete and similar porous joint substrate surfaces, by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealers. Remove loose particles remaining from above cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air.
7. Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete.
8. Steel Surfaces in Contact with Sealant: Scrape and wire brush to remove loose mill scale. Remove dirt, oil, or grease by solvent cleaning, and wipe surfaces with clean cloths.
Sealants 07920-4 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
9. Clean metal, glass, and other nonporous surfaces by chemical cleaners or other means which are not harmful to substrates or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealers.
10. Do not permit solvents to air dry. Wipe surfaces free of solvent using clean, dry white cloth or white lintless paper.
B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended by joint sealer manufacturer based on preconstruction joint sealer-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint sealer manufacturer's recommendations. Confine primers to areas of joint sealer bond, do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
C. Provide joint backer material uniformly to depth required by sealant manufacturer for proper joint design using a blunt instrument.
D. Provide bond-breaker where indicated or recommended by sealant manufacturer, adhering strictly to the manufacturers installation requirements.
E. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces which otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Apply tape so as not to shift readily and remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.
F. Examine joint size and correct to achieve depth ratio of 1/2 of joint width with a minimum width and depth of 1/4 inch, maximum width of 1 inch unless specifically allowed otherwise by the sealant manufacturer.
3.04 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALERS
A. Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of surfaces and material installation instructions.
B. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C1193.
C. Installation of Sealant Backings: Install sealant backings to comply with the following requirements:
1. Install joint fillers of type indicated to provide support of sealants during application and at position required to produce the cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths which allow optimum sealant movement capability.
a. Do not leave gaps between ends of joint fillers.
b. Fir securely by compressing backer material 25 percent to 50 percent so no displacement occurs during tooling.
Sealants 07920-5 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
c. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear joint fillers.
d. Remove absorbent joint fillers which have become wet prior to sealant application and replace with dry material.
2. Install bond breaker tape between sealants and joint fillers, compression seals, or back of joints where adhesion of sealant to surfaces at back of joints would result in sealant failure.
3. Install compressible seals serving as sealant backings to comply with requirements indicated above for joint fillers.
D. Primer: Immediately prior to application of the sealant, clean out all loose particles from joints. Where recommended by sealant manufacturer, apply primer to joints in concrete, masonry units, wood, and other porous surfaces in accordance with compound manufacturer's instructions. Do not apply primer to exposed finish surfaces.
E. Installation of Sealants: Install sealants by proven techniques that result in sealants directly contacting and fully wetting joint substrates, completely filling recesses provided for each joint configuration, and providing uniform, cross- sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths which allow optimum sealant movement capability.
F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and prior to time skinning or curing begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated, to eliminate air pockets, and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling agents which discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by sealant manufacturer.
1. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Provide flush joint configuration per Figure 58 in ASTM C 1193, where indicated.
3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealers and of products in which joints occur.
B. Clean adjacent soiled surfaces.
C. Protect joint sealers during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances or from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that they are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealers immediately
Sealants 07920-6 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
and reseal joints with new materials to produce joint sealer installations with repaired areas indistinguishable from original work.
END OF SECTION
Sealants 07920-7 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
SECTION 08110 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
As specified in Section 01019 - GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Standard and custom hollow metal doors and frames and light frames and glazing installed in hollow metal doors
B. Related Work Specified in Other Sections:
1. SECTION 07920 - SEALANTS.
1. SECTION 08710 - FINISH HARDWARE.
2. SECTION 09900 - PAINTING.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Requirements for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Materials and details of design and construction, hardware locations, reinforcement type and locations, anchorage and fastening methods, core descriptions, profiles, anchors, fire-resistance rating and finishes.
C. Door hardware supplier is to furnish templates, template reference number and/or physical hardware to the steel door and frame supplier in order to prepare the doors and frames to receive the finish hardware items.
D. Shop Drawings: Elevations of each door design, details of doors, including vertical and horizontal edge details and metal thicknesses. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, connections, accessories, moldings, removable stops, and glazing.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Source Limitations: Obtain hollow metal doors and frames through one source from a single manufacturer wherever possible.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect with resilient packaging; avoid humidity build-up under coverings; prevent corrosion.
Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08110-1 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
B. Deliver hollow metal work palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project site storage. Do not use non-vented plastic.
C. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions.
E. Store hollow metal work under cover at Project site. Place in stacks of five units maximum in a vertical position with heads up, spaced by blocking, on minimum 4-inch high wood blocking. Do not store in a manner that traps excess humidity. Provide minimum 1/4-inch space between each stacked door to permit air circulation. Door and frames to be stacked in a vertical upright position.
1.06 WARRANTY
Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Warranty includes installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL DOORS
A. General: Provide 1 - 3/4 inch doors of design indicated, not less than thickness indicated; fabricated with smooth surfaces, without visible joints or seams on exposed faces unless otherwise indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8.
B. Exterior Doors: Face sheets fabricated of commercial quality hot-dipped zinc coated steel that complies with ASTM A 653/A 653M, Coating Designation A60. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level:
1. Design: Flush panel.
2. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard polystyrene. Where indicated, provide doors fabricated as thermal-rated assemblies with a minimum R- value of 2.8 or better.
3. Top and Bottom Edges: Reinforce tops and bottoms of doors with a continuous steel channel not less than 16 gauge, extending the full width of the door and welded to the face sheet. Doors with an inverted top channel to include a steel closure channel, screw attached, with the web of the channel flush with the face sheets of the door. Plastic or composite channel fillers are not acceptable.
4. Hinge Reinforcement: Minimum 7 gauge (3/16 inch) plate 1-1/4 inch x 9 inch or minimum 14 gauge continuous channel with pierced holes, drilled and tapped.
Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08110-2 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
5. Hardware Reinforcements: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcing plates from same material as door face sheets.
C. Interior Doors: Face sheets fabricated of commercial quality cold rolled steel that complies with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level:
1. Design: Flush panel.
2. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, or one-piece polystyrene core, securely bonded to both faces.
3. Top and Bottom Edges: Reinforce tops and bottoms of doors with a continuous steel channel not less than 16 gauge, extending the full width of the door and welded to the face sheet.
4. Hinge Reinforcement: Minimum 7 gauge (3/16 inch) plate 1-1/4 inch x 9 inch or minimum 14 gauge continuous channel with pierced holes, drilled and tapped. 5. Hardware Reinforcements: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcing plates from same material as door face sheets.
2.02 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
A. General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile.
B. Exterior Frames: Fabricated of hot-dipped zinc coated steel that complies with ASTM A 653/A 653M, Coating Designation A60.
1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners.
2. Fabricate frames, with the exception of knock down types, with "closed and tight" miter seams continuously welded on face, finished smooth with no visible seam unless otherwise indicated.
C. Interior Frames: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet that complies with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M.
1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners.
2. Fabricate frames, with the exception of slip-on drywall types, with "closed and tight" miter seams continuously welded on face, finished smooth with no visible seam unless otherwise indicated.
3. Frames for Borrowed Lights: Minimum 16 gauge (0.053-inch-1.3-mm-) thick steel sheet.
Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08110-3 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
D. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 Table 4 with reinforcement plates from same material as frames.
2.03 FRAME ANCHORS
A. Jamb Anchors:
1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, formed from A60 metallic coated material, not less than 0.042 inch thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches wide by 10 inches long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch thick.
2. Stud Wall Type: Designed to engage stud and not less than 0.042 inch thick.
3. Compression Type for Drywall Slip-on (Knock-Down) Frames: Adjustable compression anchors.
4. Windstorm Opening Anchors: Types as tested and required for indicated wall types to meet specified wind load design criteria.
B. Floor Anchors: Floor anchors to be provided at each jamb, formed from A60 metallic coated material, not less than 0.042 inches thick.
C. Mortar Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inches thick.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A. Mullions and Transom Bars: Join to adjacent members by welding or rigid mechanical anchors.
B. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inches thick.
C. Window: Window openings shall be provided for at time of manufacture and shall be completely sealed so that the interior of the door is not exposed to the environment. Laminated safety glass shall be furnished and installed by door and frame manufacturer.
2.05 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate hollow metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. When shipping limitations so dictate, frames for large openings are to be fabricated in sections for splicing or splining in the field by others.
B. Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in ANSI/SDI A250.8.
Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08110-4 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
C. Hollow Metal Doors:
1. Exterior Doors: Provide optional weep-hole openings in bottom of exterior doors to permit moisture to escape where specified.
2. Astragals: Provide overlapping astragals as noted in door hardware sets in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware" on one leaf of pairs of doors where required by NFPA 80 for fire-performance rating or where indicated. Extend minimum 3/4 inch beyond edge of door on which astragal is mounted.
3. Continuous Hinge Reinforcement: Provide welded continuous 12 gauge strap for continuous hinges specified in hardware sets in SECTION 08710 - FINISH HARDWARE.
D. Hollow Metal Frames:
1. Shipping Limitations: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames.
2. Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth, flush, and invisible.
a. Welded frames are to be provided with two steel spreaders temporarily attached to the bottom of both jambs to serve as a brace during shipping and handling. Spreader bars are for bracing only and are not to be used to size the frame opening.
3. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated for removable stops, provide security screws at exterior locations.
4. Mortar Guards: Provide guard boxes at back of hardware mortises in frames at all hinges and strike preps regardless of grouting requirements.
5. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot welds per anchor.
6. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:
a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches on center and as follows:
1) Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high.
2) Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high.
3) Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches high.
Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08110-5 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
4) Four anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches or fraction thereof above 120 inches high.
b. Stud Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches on center and as follows:
1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high.
2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high.
3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches high.
4) Five anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches or fraction thereof above 96 inches high.
5) Two anchors per head for frames above 42 inches wide and mounted in metal stud partitions.
7. Door Silencers: Except on weatherstripped or gasketed doors, drill stops to receive door silencers. Silencers to be supplied by frame manufacturer regardless if specified in SECTION 08710 - FINISH HARDWARE.
E. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive template mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in SECTION 08710 - FINISH HARDWARE.
1. Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI/SDI A250.8.
2. Reinforce doors and frames to receive non-template, mortised and surface mounted door hardware.
3. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI A115 Series specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware.
2.05 FINISHES
A. Prime Finishes: Doors and frames to be cleaned, and chemically treated to insure maximum finish paint adhesion. Surfaces of the door and frame exposed to view to receive a factory applied coat of rust inhibiting shop primer. Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead and chromate free primer complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; and compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings.
Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08110-6 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION
A. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.
B. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
D. Prior to installation, adjust and securely brace welded hollow metal frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumbness.
E. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive non-template, mortised, and surface- mounted door hardware.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install hollow metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place; comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Hollow Metal Frames: Install hollow metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.11. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete and frames properly set and secured, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances.
1. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with post-installed expansion anchors.
2. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between frames and masonry with mortar.
3. Grout Requirements: Do not grout head of frames unless reinforcing has been installed in head of frame. Do not grout vertical or horizontal closed mullion members.
C. Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim as necessary.
1. Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch.
2. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch.
3. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch.
Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08110-7 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
4. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Maximum 3/4 inch.
D. TOLERANCES
1. Clearances Between Door and Frame: As specified in ANSI A250.8.
2. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 in measured with straight edge, corner to corner.
3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjust for smooth and balanced door movement.
B. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.
C. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow metal work immediately after installation.
D. Prime-Coat and Painted Finish Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat, or painted finishes, and apply touchup of compatible air drying, rust-inhibitive primer, zinc rich primer (exterior and galvanized openings) or finish paint.
END OF SECTION
Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08110-8 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS
SECTION 08110 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
As specified in Section 01019 - GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Standard and custom hollow metal doors and frames and light frames and glazing installed in hollow metal doors
B. Related Work Specified in Other Sections:
1. SECTION 07920 - SEALANTS.
1. SECTION 08710 - FINISH HARDWARE.
2. SECTION 09900 - PAINTING.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Requirements for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Materials and details of design and construction, hardware locations, reinforcement type and locations, anchorage and fastening methods, core descriptions, profiles, anchors, fire-resistance rating and finishes.
C. Door hardware supplier is to furnish templates, template reference number and/or physical hardware to the steel door and frame supplier in order to prepare the doors and frames to receive the finish hardware items.
D. Shop Drawings: Elevations of each door design, details of doors, including vertical and horizontal edge details and metal thicknesses. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, connections, accessories, moldings, removable stops, and glazing.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Source Limitations: Obtain hollow metal doors and frames through one source from a single manufacturer wherever possible.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect with resilient packaging; avoid humidity build-up under coverings; prevent
Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08110-1 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
corrosion.
B. Deliver hollow metal work palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project site storage. Do not use non-vented plastic.
C. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions.
E. Store hollow metal work under cover at Project site. Place in stacks of five units maximum in a vertical position with heads up, spaced by blocking, on minimum 4-inch high wood blocking. Do not store in a manner that traps excess humidity. Provide minimum 1/4-inch space between each stacked door to permit air circulation. Door and frames to be stacked in a vertical upright position.
1.06 WARRANTY
Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Warranty includes installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL DOORS
A. General: Provide 1 - 3/4 inch doors of design indicated, not less than thickness indicated; fabricated with smooth surfaces, without visible joints or seams on exposed faces unless otherwise indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8.
B. Exterior Doors: Face sheets fabricated of commercial quality hot-dipped zinc coated steel that complies with ASTM A 653/A 653M, Coating Designation A60. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level:
1. Design: Flush panel.
2. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard polystyrene. Where indicated, provide doors fabricated as thermal-rated assemblies with a minimum R- value of 2.8 or better.
3. Top and Bottom Edges: Reinforce tops and bottoms of doors with a continuous steel channel not less than 16 gauge, extending the full width of the door and welded to the face sheet. Doors with an inverted top channel to include a steel closure channel, screw attached, with the web of the channel flush with the face sheets of the door. Plastic or composite channel fillers are not acceptable.
4. Hinge Reinforcement: Minimum 7 gauge (3/16 inch) plate 1-1/4 inch x 9
Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08110-2 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
inch or minimum 14 gauge continuous channel with pierced holes, drilled and tapped.
5. Hardware Reinforcements: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcing plates from same material as door face sheets.
C. Interior Doors: Face sheets fabricated of commercial quality cold rolled steel that complies with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level:
1. Design: Flush panel.
2. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, or one-piece polystyrene core, securely bonded to both faces.
3. Top and Bottom Edges: Reinforce tops and bottoms of doors with a continuous steel channel not less than 16 gauge, extending the full width of the door and welded to the face sheet.
4. Hinge Reinforcement: Minimum 7 gauge (3/16 inch) plate 1-1/4 inch x 9 inch or minimum 14 gauge continuous channel with pierced holes, drilled and tapped. 5. Hardware Reinforcements: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcing plates from same material as door face sheets.
2.02 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
A. General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile.
B. Exterior Frames: Fabricated of hot-dipped zinc coated steel that complies with ASTM A 653/A 653M, Coating Designation A60.
1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners.
2. Fabricate frames, with the exception of knock down types, with "closed and tight" miter seams continuously welded on face, finished smooth with no visible seam unless otherwise indicated.
C. Interior Frames: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet that complies with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M.
1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners.
2. Fabricate frames, with the exception of slip-on drywall types, with "closed and tight" miter seams continuously welded on face, finished smooth with no visible seam unless otherwise indicated.
3. Frames for Borrowed Lights: Minimum 16 gauge (0.053-inch-1.3-mm-) thick
Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08110-3 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
steel sheet.
D. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 Table 4 with reinforcement plates from same material as frames.
2.03 FRAME ANCHORS
A. Jamb Anchors:
1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, formed from A60 metallic coated material, not less than 0.042 inch thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches wide by 10 inches long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch thick.
2. Stud Wall Type: Designed to engage stud and not less than 0.042 inch thick.
3. Compression Type for Drywall Slip-on (Knock-Down) Frames: Adjustable compression anchors.
4. Windstorm Opening Anchors: Types as tested and required for indicated wall types to meet specified wind load design criteria.
B. Floor Anchors: Floor anchors to be provided at each jamb, formed from A60 metallic coated material, not less than 0.042 inches thick.
C. Mortar Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inches thick.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A. Mullions and Transom Bars: Join to adjacent members by welding or rigid mechanical anchors.
B. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inches thick.
C. Window: Window openings shall be provided for at time of manufacture and shall be completely sealed so that the interior of the door is not exposed to the environment. Laminated safety glass shall be furnished and installed by door and frame manufacturer.
2.05 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate hollow metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. When shipping limitations so dictate, frames for large openings are to be fabricated in sections for splicing or splining in the field by others.
Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08110-4 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
B. Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in ANSI/SDI A250.8.
C. Hollow Metal Doors:
1. Exterior Doors: Provide optional weep-hole openings in bottom of exterior doors to permit moisture to escape where specified.
2. Astragals: Provide overlapping astragals as noted in door hardware sets in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware" on one leaf of pairs of doors where required by NFPA 80 for fire-performance rating or where indicated. Extend minimum 3/4 inch beyond edge of door on which astragal is mounted.
3. Continuous Hinge Reinforcement: Provide welded continuous 12 gauge strap for continuous hinges specified in hardware sets in SECTION 08710 - FINISH HARDWARE.
D. Hollow Metal Frames:
1. Shipping Limitations: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames.
2. Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth, flush, and invisible.
a. Welded frames are to be provided with two steel spreaders temporarily attached to the bottom of both jambs to serve as a brace during shipping and handling. Spreader bars are for bracing only and are not to be used to size the frame opening.
3. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated for removable stops, provide security screws at exterior locations.
4. Mortar Guards: Provide guard boxes at back of hardware mortises in frames at all hinges and strike preps regardless of grouting requirements.
5. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot welds per anchor.
6. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:
a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches on center and as follows:
1) Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high.
2) Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high.
Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08110-5 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
3) Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches high.
4) Four anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches or fraction thereof above 120 inches high.
b. Stud Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches on center and as follows:
1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high.
2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high.
3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches high.
4) Five anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches or fraction thereof above 96 inches high.
5) Two anchors per head for frames above 42 inches wide and mounted in metal stud partitions.
7. Door Silencers: Except on weatherstripped or gasketed doors, drill stops to receive door silencers. Silencers to be supplied by frame manufacturer regardless if specified in SECTION 08710 - FINISH HARDWARE.
E. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive template mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in SECTION 08710 - FINISH HARDWARE.
1. Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI/SDI A250.8.
2. Reinforce doors and frames to receive non-template, mortised and surface mounted door hardware.
3. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI A115 Series specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware.
2.05 FINISHES
A. Prime Finishes: Doors and frames to be cleaned, and chemically treated to insure maximum finish paint adhesion. Surfaces of the door and frame exposed to view to receive a factory applied coat of rust inhibiting shop primer. Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead and chromate free primer complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; and compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings.
Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08110-6 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION
A. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.
B. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
D. Prior to installation, adjust and securely brace welded hollow metal frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumbness.
E. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive non-template, mortised, and surface- mounted door hardware.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install hollow metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place; comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Hollow Metal Frames: Install hollow metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.11. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete and frames properly set and secured, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances.
1. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with post-installed expansion anchors.
2. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between frames and masonry with mortar.
3. Grout Requirements: Do not grout head of frames unless reinforcing has been installed in head of frame. Do not grout vertical or horizontal closed mullion members.
C. Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim as necessary.
1. Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch.
2. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch.
3. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch.
Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08110-7 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
4. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Maximum 3/4 inch.
D. TOLERANCES
1. Clearances Between Door and Frame: As specified in ANSI A250.8.
2. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 in measured with straight edge, corner to corner.
3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjust for smooth and balanced door movement.
B. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.
C. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow metal work immediately after installation.
D. Prime-Coat and Painted Finish Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat, or painted finishes, and apply touchup of compatible air drying, rust-inhibitive primer, zinc rich primer (exterior and galvanized openings) or finish paint.
END OF SECTION
Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08110-8 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
SECTION 08500 - VINYL WINDOWS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
As specified in Section 01019 - GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Provide vinyl awning windows complete with stainless steel hardware, glazing, weather strip, insect screen, and specified anchors, trims, and attachments.
B. Related Work Specified In Other Sections:
1. SECTION 07110 - MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING.
2. Sealants shall be exterior type for moving joints as specified in SECTION 07920 - SEALANTS.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of SECTION 01300 - SUBMITTALS.
B. Manufacturer's Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, material descriptions, glazing and fabrication methods, dimensions of individual components and profiles, hardware, and finishes for fiberglass windows.
C. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's shop drawings, indicating dimensions, construction, component connections and locations, anchorage methods and locations, hardware locations, and installation details.
D. Samples: Submit full-size or partial full-size sample of window illustrating glazing system, quality of construction, and color of finish.
E. Warranty: Submit warranty as stipulated in item entitled "WARRANTY" hereinbelow.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufactures Qualifications: A manufacturer capable of fabricating fiberglass windows that meet or exceed performance requirements indicated and of documenting this performance by test reports and calculations.
B. Installer Qualifications: An installer acceptable to vinyl window manufacturer for installation of unites require for this Project.
C. Glass Standards: All glass, except as noted otherwise, shall comply with ASTM C 1036, "Flat Glass". Tempered glass shall comply with ASTM C 1048, "Heat- Strengthened and Fully Tempered Flat Glass". Laminated glass shall comply with
Vinyl Windows 08500-1 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
ASTM C 1172, "Laminated Architectural Flat Glass".
D. Safety Glass Standard: All glass indicated on the drawings or as required to be safety glass shall meet all the requirements of the "Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Material", 16 CFR Part 1201 dated January 6, 1977 of the Consumer Product Safety Commission or ANSI Z97.1, "Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test for Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings", as applicable.
E. Exterior glass thickness and strengths (annealed or heat-treated) shall be as indicated but no less than required to withstand a 120 mph windloading pressure (positive and negative) acting normal to pane of glass as calculated in accordance with the ICC IBC, Exposure C, and ASTM E 1300, "Determining Load Resistance of Glass in Buildings", and ASTM E 330/E 330M, "Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference".
F. Limit glass deflection to 1/200 flexure limit of glass with full recovery of glazing materials.
G. Sealants for glazing shall conform to AAMA 800, "Voluntary Specifications and Test Methods for Sealants", and AAMA 850, "Fenestration Sealant Guide Manual".
1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Materials delivered to the jobsite shall be inspected for damage, and shall b unloaded with minimum of handling. Use care in handling and hoisting windows during transportation and at the jobsite. Store windows and components out of contact with the ground, under a weathertight covering, so as to prevent bending, warping, or otherwise damaging the materials. Windows shall not be covered with tarps, polyethylene film, or similar coverings.
B. Damaged windows shall be repaired to an "as new" condition as accepted. If materials cannot be repaired, provide a new unit.
C. Handle manufactured materials as recommended by the manufacturer.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace vinyl windows that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but not limited to, the following:
a. Failure to meeting performance requirements.
b. Structural failures including excessive deflection, water damage, and air infiltration.
Vinyl Windows 08500-2 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
c. Faulty operation of moveable sash and hardware.
d. Deterioration of materials and finished beyond normal weathering.
e. Failure of glass.
2. Warranty Period:
a. Window: 20 years from date of project acceptance.
b. Glazing Units: Clear insulating glass with stainless steel spaces is warranted against seal failure caused by manufacturing defects and resulting in visible obstruction through the glass for 20 years from date of project acceptance. Glass is warranted against stress cracks caused by manufacturing defects from 20 years from date of project acceptance.
c. Hardware and other non - glass components are warranted to be free from manufacturing defects for 20 years from date of project acceptance.
B. The Surety shall not be held liable beyond 2 years from the project acceptance date.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 VINYL AWNING WINDOWS:
A. Description: 200 Series assembled vinyl awning operating windows.
B. Manufacturer: Costal Windows, 94-533 Puahi Street, Waipahu, Hawaii 96797.
C. Source Limitation: Obtain vinyl windows from single source from single vendor.
2.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS:
A. Product Standard: Comply with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 for definition and minimum standards of performance, materials, components, accessories, and fabrication unless more stringent requirements are indicated:
Window Certification: WDMA certified with label attached to each window.
B. Performance Class and Grade: AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 as follows:
1. Minimum Performance Class: CW.
2. Minimum Performance Grade: DP-80.
C. Window Air Leakage, ASTM E 283: Window air leakage when tested at 6.24 psf (50 mph) shall be 0.01 scfm per square foot of frame or less.
Vinyl Windows 08500-3 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
D. Window Water Penetration, ASTM E 547 & ASTM E 331: No water penetration through window when tested under maximum static pressure of 12.0 psf (179 mph) after 4 cycles of 5 minutes each, and 15 minutes, with water being applied at a rate of 5 gallons per hour per square foot.
E. Thermal Performance: Comply with NFRC 100, NFRC 200, and ASTM 1363.
2.03 FRAME DESCRIPTION
A. Exterior and Interior: Solid vinyl thermally welded.
B. Frame Depth: 2-3/4 inches
C. Frame Corners: Mitered and heat fused to provide fully welded corner assembly with smooth virtually invisible interior corner welds.
2.04 SASH/PANEL DESCRIPTION
A. Exterior and Interior: Solid vinyl thermally welded.
B. Frame Corners: Mitered and heat fused to provide fully welded corner assembly with smooth virtually invisible interior corner welds.
2.05. FINISH
Factory-applied two part urethane paint, compliant with AAMA 623. Color selected by Engineer from manufacturer's standard colors. Total dry film thicknss 0.8 mil.
2.06 GLAZING
A. All glass products shall be of the quality as manufactured by Cardinal Glass Industries, Inc. PPG Industries, Inc., Pilkington LOF, ASG Industries, CE Glass Company, Globe Amerada Glass Co., Guardian Industries, Interpane Glass Co., Sierracin/Sylmar, Viracon, Inc., or pre-approved equal.
B. Laminated Glass (Safety Glass): ASTM C 1172, two pieces of Type I, Class 1, Quality q3 glass laminated together with a clear 0.090-inch thick polyvinyl butyral interlayer under pressure or alternatives such as resin laminates conforming to requirements of 16 CFR 1201 orASTM C 1172. Total thickness shall be not less than nominal 7/1 6-inch.
C. Glazing Compounds - Sealant for Exterior Glazing: One-Part silicone, medium modulus, ASTM C 920, Type 5, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT, M, G, A, and 0, equivalent to Dow Corning 795 Silicone Building Sealant, General Electric Corp. SilGiaze II SCS 2800, or Tremco, Inc. Spectrum 2, Pecora 895N5T, or preapproved equal as recommended by the glass manufacturers.
C. Glazing Tape for Interior Glazing: Preformed butyl-polyisobutylene glazing tape. Provide one of the following, or pre-approved equal:
Vinyl Windows 08500-4 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
1. "Chem-Tape 401"; Bostick Construction Products Div.
2. "Extru-Seal"; Pecora Corp.
3. Tremco 440 Tape"; Tremco, Inc.
D. Miscellaneous Glazing Materials:
1. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Of type recommended by sealant manufacturer.
2. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, EPDM, or 100 percent silicone, 80-90 Shore A durometer hardness as recommended by the glass manufacturer.
3. Spacers: Neoprene or EPDM, 50-60 Shore A durometer hardness.
2.07 HARDWARE
A. Operator: Steel scissor arm operator with hardened gears.
1. Operator Base: Zinc die cast with painted E-Gard finish.
2. Operator Linkage, Hinge Slide, and Hinge Arms: Zinc die cast single-handle locking system on each jamb.
3. Exposed Fasteners: Stainless steel.
4. Hardware Salt Spray Exposure, ASTM B 117: Exceed 1,000 hours.
B. Crank Handle Finish: Integrated Folding Crank, baked enamel to match interior finish.
C. Locking System: Multi-Point Locking System.
1. Dual Single-handle locking system.
2. Operate positive-acting arms that pull sash into locked position at bottom.
3. One or two locking points on each jamb.
4. Lock Handle Finish: Baked enamel.
2.08 WEATHER STRIPPING
A. Single foam filled weather stripping on sash.
B. Dual foam filled weather stripping on frame.
Vinyl Windows 08500-5 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
2.09 INSET SCREENS
Factory-installed, 18/16 mesh, charcoal fiberglass with aluminum frame fitted to inside of window, complete with necessary hardware. Screen Frame Finish shall be baked enamel color matched to window interior. Comply with ASTM D 3656 and SMA 1201.
2.10 FLASHING/SEALANT TAPE
A. Flashing/Sealant Tape: Manufacturer compliant sealant, aluminum-foil-backed butyl window and door flashing tape. Maximum Total Thickness of 0.013 inch, UV resistant.
B. Insulating-Foam Sealant: Dow Window & Door, low-pressure, polyurethane window and door insulating-foam sealant.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
Examine areas to receive windows. Notify Engineer of conditions that would adversely affect installation or subsequent use. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing windows, hardware, accessories, and other components. For installation procedures and requirements not address in manufacturer's written instructions, comply with installation requirements in ASTM E2112.
B. Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing and other adjacent construction to produce watertight construction.
C. Install sealant and related backing materials at perimeter of unit or assembly in accordance with SECTION 07920 - SEALANTS. So not use expansive foam sealant.
D. Install accessory items as required.
E. Use finish nails to apply wood trim and moldings.
3.03 ADJUSTING, CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Adjust operating sashes and hardware for a tight fit at contact points and weather stripping for smooth operation and weathertight closure.
B. Clean exposed surfaces immediately after installing windows. Remove excess
Vinyl Windows 08500-6 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances.
C. Keep protective films and coverings in place until final clean.
D. Remove and replace sashes if glass has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period.
E. Protect window surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. If contaminating substances do not contact window surfaces, remove contaminants immediately accordingly to manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION
Vinyl Windows 08500-7 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
SECTION 08710 - FINISH HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
As specified in SECTION 01019 - GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Door hardware including but not limited to hinges, locksets, latchsets, deadbolts, closers, door stops, thresholds, seals and fastners.
B. Related Work Specified In Other Sections:
1. SECTION 07920 - SEALANTS
2. SECTION 08110 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
3. SECTION 08330 - OVERHEAD COILING SERVICE DOORS
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit 6 copies of finish schedule. Organize vertically formatted schedule into "Hardware Sets" with index of doors and headings, indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Minimum 10 pt font size. Include following information:
1. Type, style, function, size, quantity and finish of hardware items.
2. Use BHMA Finish codes per ANSI A156.18.
3. Name, part number and manufacturer of each item.
4. Fastenings and other pertinent information.
5. Location of hardware set coordinated with floor plans and door schedule.
6. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule.
7. Mounting locations for hardware.
8. Door and frame sizes, materials and degrees of swing.
9. List of manufacturers used and their nearest representative with address and phone number.
10. Catalog cuts.
11. Date of jobsite visit.
Finish Hardware 08710-1 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
B. Bid and submit manufacturer’s updated/improved item if scheduled item is discontinued.
C. Deviations: Highlight, encircle or otherwise identify deviations from "Schedule of Finish Hardware" on submittal with notations clearly designating those portions as deviating from this section.
D. If discrepancy between drawings and scheduled material in this section, bid the more expensive of the two choices, note the discrepancy in the submittal and request direction from Engineer for resolution.
E. Items listed with no substitute manufacturers have been requested by Owner to meet existing standard.
F. Furnish as-built/as-installed schedule with closeout documents, including keying schedule, manufacturers’ installation, adjustment and maintenance information, and supplier’s final inspection report.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Hardware Supplier: Direct factory contract supplier who employs a certified architectural hardware consultant (AHC), available at reasonable times during course of work for project hardware consultation to Engineer.
1. Responsible for detailing, scheduling and ordering of finish hardware. Detailing implies that the submitted schedule of hardware is correct and complete for the intended function and performance of the openings.
B. Hardware: Free of defects, blemishes and excessive play. Obtain each kind of hardware (latch and locksets, exit devices, hinges and closers) from one manufacturer.
C. Exit Doors: Operable from inside with single motion without the use of a key or special knowledge or effort.
D. Furnish hardware items required to complete the work in accordance with specified performance level and design intent, complying with manufacturers’ instructions and code requirements.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Delivery: coordinate delivery to appropriate locations (shop or field).
1. Permanent keys and cores: Secured delivery direct to Engineer.
B. Acceptance at Site: Items individually packaged in manufacturers’ original containers, complete with proper fasteners and related pieces. Clearly mark packages to indicate contents, locations in hardware schedule and door numbers.
Finish Hardware 08710-2 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
C. Storage: Provide securely locked storage area for hardware, protect from moisture, sunlight, paint, chemicals, dust, excessive heat and cold, etc.
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS AND COORDINATION
A. Where exact types of hardware specified are not adaptable to finished shape or size of members requiring hardware, provide suitable types having as nearly as practical the same operation and quality as type specified, subject to Architect’s approval.
B. Coordination: Coordinate hardware with other work. Furnish hardware items of proper design for use on doors and frames of the thickness, profile, swing, security and similar requirements indicated, as necessary for proper installation and function, regardless of omissions or conflicts in the information on the Contract Documents. Furnish related trades with the following information:
1. Location of embedded and attached items to concrete.
2. Location of wall-mounted hardware, including wall stops.
3. Location of finish floor materials and floor-mounted hardware.
4. At masonry construction, coordinate with the anchoring and hollow metal supplier prior to frame installation by placing a strip of insulation, wood, or foam, on the back of the hollow metal frame behind the rabbet section for continuous hinges, as well as at rim panic hardware strike locations, silencers, coordinators, and door closer arm locations. When the frame is grouted in place, the backing will allow drilling and tapping without dulling or breaking the installer’s bits.
5. Locations for conduit and raceways as needed for electrical hardware items. Fire/life-safety system interfacing. Point-to-point wiring diagrams plus riser diagrams to related trades.
6. Coordinate: flush top rails of doors at outswinging exteriors, and throughout where adhesive-mounted seals occur.
7. Manufacturers’ templates to door and frame fabricators.
C. Check Shop Drawings for doors and entrances to confirm that adequate provisions will be made for proper hardware installation.
D. Environmental Considerations: Segregate unused recyclable paper and paper product packaging, uninstalled metals, and plastics, and have these sent to a recycling center.
E. Prior to submittal, carefully inspect existing conditions to verify finish hardware required to complete Work, including sizes, quantities, existing hardware scheduled for re-use, and sill condition material. If conflict between the
Finish Hardware 08710-3 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
specified/scheduled hardware and existing conditions, submit request for direction from Engineer. Include date of jobsite visit in the submittal. Submittals prepared without thorough jobsite visit by qualified hardware expert will be rejected as non-compliant.
1.07 WARRANTY
Part of respective manufacturers’ regular terms of sale. Provide manufacturers’ written warranties: 1. Locksets: 3 years
2. Extra Heavy Duty Cylindrical Lock (ND Series Lever: 10 Years
3. Exit Devices: 3 years mechanical
4. Closers (4000/1460 Series): 30 years mechanical
5. Hinges: 1 year
6. Other Hardware: 2 years
1.08 TESTING
A. Conduct these tests prior to request for certificate of substantial completion:
1. With installer present, test door hardware operation with climate control system and stairwell pressurization system both at rest and while in full operation.
2. With installer and electrical contractor present, test hardware interfaced with fire/life-safety system for proper operation and release.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers and their abbreviations used in this schedule:
BES Best Lock IVE H.B. Ives LCN LCN Commercial PEM Pemko SCH Schlage Lock
2.02 HINGING METHODS
A. Drawings typically depict doors at 90 degrees, doors will actually swing to maximum allowable.
Finish Hardware 08710-4 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
B. Conform to manufacturer’s published hinge selection standard for door dimensions, weight and frequency, and to hinge selection as scheduled. Where manufacturer’s standard exceeds the scheduled product, furnish the heavier of the two choices and notify Architect of deviation from scheduled hardware.
C. Conventional Hinges: Steel or stainless steel pins and concealed bearings. Hinge open widths minimum, but of sufficient throw to permit maximum door swing.
1. Outswinging exterior doors: non-ferrous with non-removable (NRP) pins and security studs.
2. Non-ferrous material exteriors and at doors subject to corrosive atmospheric conditions.
2.03 LOCKSETS, LATCHSETS, DEADBOLTS
A. Extra Heavy Duty Cylindrical Locks and Latches: as scheduled.
1. Chassis: Cylindrical design, corrosion-resistant plated cold-rolled steel, through-bolted.
2. Locking Spindle: Stainless steel, integrated spring and spindle design.
3. Latch Retractors: forged steel. Balance of inner parts: corrosion-resistant plated steel, or stainless steel.
4. Latchbolt: Solid steel.
5. Backset: 2.75 inches typically, more or less as needed to accommodate frame, door or other hardware.
6. Lever Trim: accessible design, independent operation, spring-cage supported, minimum 2.00 inches clearance from lever mid-point to door face.
7. Strikes: 16 gage curved steel, bronze or brass with 1.00 inch deep box construction, lips of sufficient length to clear trim and protect clothing.
8. Lock Series and Design: Schlage ND series, "Athens" design.
9. Certifications: a) ANSI A156.2, 1994, Series 4000, Grade 1.
b) UL listed for A label and lesser class single doors up to 4 feet x 8 feet.
2.04 CLOSERS
A. Surface Closers: 1461
1. Full rack-and-pinion type cylinder with removable non-ferrous cover and
Finish Hardware 08710-5 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
cast iron body. Double heat-treated pinion shaft, single piece forged piston, chrome-silicon steel spring.
2. ISO 2000 certified. Units stamped with date-of-manufacture code.
3. Independent lab-tested 5,000,000 cycles.
4. Non-sized, non-handed and adjustable. Place closers inside building, stairs and rooms.
5. Plates, brackets and special templating when needed for interface with particular header, door and wall conditions and neighboring hardware.
6. Adjustable to open with not more than 8.0-pounds pressure to open at exterior doors and 5.0-pounds at interior doors.
7. Separate adjusting valves for closing speed, latching speed and back check, fourth valve for delayed action where scheduled.
8. Extra-duty arms (EDA) at exterior doors scheduled with parallel arm units.
9. Exterior door closers: tested to 100 hours of ASTM B117 salt spray test, furnish data on request.
10. Exterior doors: seasonal adjustments not required for temperatures from 120 degrees F to 0 degrees F, furnish checking fluid data on request.
11. Non-flaming fluid, will not fuel door or floor covering fires.
12. Pressure Relief Valves (PRV) not permitted.
2.05 OTHER HARDWARE
A. Door Stops: Provide stops to protect walls, casework or other hardware.
1. Unless otherwise noted in Hardware Sets, provide floor type with appropriate fasteners. Where floor type cannot be used, provide wall type. If neither can be used, provide overhead type.
B. Seals: Inelastic, rigid back, not subject to stretching. Self-compensating for warp, thermal bow, door settling, and out-of-plumb. Adhesive warranted for life of installation.
C. Thresholds: As scheduled and per details. Comply with ICC/ANSI A117.1 Section 404.2.4 & 303. Substitute products: certify that the products equal or exceed specified material’s thickness. Proposed substitutions: submit for approval.
1. Saddle thresholds: 0.125 inches minimum thickness.
Finish Hardware 08710-6 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
2. Exteriors: Seal perimeter to exclude water and vermin. Use sealant complying with requirements in SECTION 07920 - SEALANTS. Minimum 0.25 inch diameter fasteners and lead expansion shield anchors, or Red- Head #SFS-1420 (or approved equivalent) Flat Head Sleeve Anchors (SS/FHSL).
3. Plastic plugs with wood or sheet metal screws are not an acceptable substitute for specified fastening methods.
4. Fasteners: Generally, exposed screws to be Phillips or Robertson drive. Pinned TORX drive at high security areas. Flat head sleeve anchors (FHSL) may be slotted drive. Sheet metal and wood screws: full-thread. Sleeve nuts: full length to prevent door compression.
2.06 FINISH
A. GENERAL: ANSI/BHMA A5133 - Stainless Steel.
B. Door Closers: Standard color, unless otherwise noted.
2.07 KEYING REQUIREMENTS
Key System: Existing key system. Initiate and conduct meeting(s) with State to determine system structure, furnish State’s written approval of the system; do not order keys or cylinders without written confirmation of actual requirements from the State. Furnish temporary construction-keyed and permanent cylinders. Contractor to demonstrate to the State that temporary keys no longer operate the locking cylinders at the end of the project.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 ACCEPTABLE INSTALLERS
Installers shall be able to read and understand manufacturers’ templates, suppliers’ hardware schedule and printed installation instructions. Installs shall be able to readily distinguish drywall screws from manufacturers’ furnished fasteners. Available to meet with manufacturers’ representatives and related trades to discuss installation of hardware.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Ensure that walls and frames are square and plumb before hardware installation. Make corrections before commencing hardware installation. Installation denotes acceptance of wall/frame condition.
B. Locate hardware per SDI-100 and applicable building, fire, life-safety, accessibility, and security codes.
1. Notify Engineer of code conflicts before ordering material.
Finish Hardware 08710-7 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
2. Locate latching hardware between 34 inches to 44 inches above the finished floor.
3. Locate panic hardware between 36 inches to 44 inches above the finished floor.
4. Where new hardware is to be installed near existing doors/hardware scheduled to remain, match locations of existing hardware.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install hardware per manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrate. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrate for proper installation and operation. Remove and reinstall or replace work deemed defective by Engineer.
1. Gaskets: install jamb-applied gaskets before closers, overhead stops, rim strikes, etc; fasten hardware over and through these seals. Install sweeps across bottoms of doors before astragals, cope sweeps around bottom pivots, trim astragals to tops of sweeps.
2. When hardware is to be attached to existing metal surface and insufficient reinforcement exists, use RivNuts, NutSerts or similar anchoring device for screws.
3. Use manufacturers' fasteners furnished with hardware items, or submit Request for Substitution to Engineer.
4. Replace fasteners damaged by power-driven tools.
B. Locate floor stops no more than 4 inches from walls and not within paths of travel.
C. Core concrete for exterior door stop anchors. Set anchors in approved non-shrink grout.
D. Drill pilot holes for fasteners in wood doors and/or frames.
E. Field-verify existing conditions and measurements prior to ordering hardware. Fill existing hardware cut outs not being used by the new hardware.
F. Provide manufacturer’s recommended brackets to accommodate the mounting of closers on doors with flush transoms.
3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust and check for proper operation and function. Replace units, which cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly.
Finish Hardware 08710-8 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
1. Hardware damaged by improper installation or adjustment methods: repair or replace to State's satisfaction.
2. Adjust doors to fully latch with no more than 1 pound of pressure.
3. Adjust door closers for proper function.
C. Final Inspection: Installer to provide letter to State that upon completion installer has visited the Project and has accomplished the following:
1. Has re-adjusted hardware.
2. Has evaluated maintenance procedures and recommend changes or additions, and instructed State's personnel.
3. Has identified items that have deteriorated or failed.
4. Has submitted written report identifying problems.
3.05 PROTECTION/CLEANING
A. Cover installed hardware, protect from paint, cleaning agents, weathering, carts/barrows, etc. Remove covering materials and clean hardware just prior to substantial completion.
B. Clean adjacent wall, frame and door surfaces soiled from installation / reinstallation process.
3.07 SCHEDULE OF FINISH HARDWARE
A. See door schedule in drawings for hardware set assignments.
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 01
Qty Description Catalog Number Finish Mfr 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 630 IVE 1 EA VANDL ENTRANCE ND92BD RHO 626 SCH LOCK 1 EA PERMANENT CORE DEALER SUPPLIED 626 BES 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 1461 EDA SRI 689 LCN 1 EA FLOOR STOP FS444 626 IVE 1 EA DOOR BOTTOM 210AV AL PEM 1 EA THRESHOLD 171A AL PEM
Key to existing system.
Finish Hardware 08710-9 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 02
Qty Description Catalog Number Finish Mfr 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 630 IVE 1 EA VANDL ENTRANCE ND92BD RHO 626 SCH LOCK 1 EA PERMANENT CORE DEALER SUPPLIED 626 BES 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 1461 EDA SRI 689 LCN 1 EA FLOOR STOP FS444 626 IVE 2 SET SEALS S88D DKB PEM 1 EA DOOR BOTTOM 434ARL AL PEM 1 EA THRESHOLD 2005AV AL PEM
Key to existing system.
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 03
Qty Description Catalog Number Finish Mfr HARDWARE BY DOOR MANUFACTURER
END OF SECTION
Finish Hardware 08710-10 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
SECTION 08330 - OVERHEAD COILING SERVICE DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
As specified in Section 01019 - GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS.
1.02 SUMMARY
Manual overhead coiling service doors complete as specified hereinbelow.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01300 Submittal for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Material description and manufacturer's recommended installation procedures for each material.
C. Shop Drawings: Include special conditions not detailed in Product Data. Show interface with adjacent work.
D. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals: Provide proof of manufacturer ISO 9001:2008 registration, proof of manufacturer and installer qualifications - see 1.4 below and manufacturer's installation instructions.
E. Closeout Submittals: Operation and Maintenance Manual and Certificate stating that installed materials comply with this specification.
F. Warranty: Submit warranty as stipulated in item entitled “WARRANTY” hereinbelow.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: ISO 9001:2008 registered and a minimum of 5 years experience in producing doors of the type specified.
B. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's approval.
1.05 WARRANTY
A. Standard Warranty: Two years from date of shipment against defects in material and workmanship.
B. Maintenance: Submit for owner’s consideration and acceptance of a maintenance service agreement for installed products.
Overhead Coiling Service Doors 08330-1 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 OVERHEAD COILING SERVICE DOOR
A. Manufacturer: The Cookson Company, Inc., 2417 S 50th Avenue, Phoenix, AZ 85063-3880. Telephone: (800) 294-4358, Fax: (866) 448-6798 or Pre-Approved Equal.
2.02 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Wind Loading: Supply doors to withstand up to 20 psf maximum wind load.
B. Cycle Life: Design doors of standard construction for normal use of up to 20 cycles per day maximum, and an overall maximum of 50,000 operating cycles for the life of the door.
2.03 OVERHEAD COILING SERVICE DOOR DESCRIPTION
A. Curtain
1. Slats: No. 5, 20 gauge, Grade 40 steel, ASTM A 653 galvanized steel zinc coating.
2. Bottom Bar: Two 2 x 2 x 1/8 inch (50 x 50 x 3.2 mm) structural steel angles.
3. Fabricate interlocking sections with high strength malleable steel endlocks on alternate slats each secured with rivets. Provide windlocks as required to meet specified wind load.
4. Slat Finish: ColorCote Coating System to include an ASTM A 653 galvanized base coating, bonderized coating for prime coat adhesion, and factory applied thermosetting powder coating applied with a minimum thickness of 2.5 mils. The color shall be selected by the Engineer and shall be chosen from the manufacture's standard color chart.
5. Curtain Configuration: Standard Curtain configuration.
6. Bottom Bar Finish: Steel, factory applied thermosetting powder coat. The finish shall be the same Cookson ColorCote finish as indicated in the curtain section.
7. Bottom Bar Configuration: Standard Bottom Bar Configuration.
B. Guides: Fabricate with structural steel angles bolted together with 3/8 inch fasteners to form a channel for the curtain to travel. The wall angle portion shall be continuous and fastened to the surrounding structure with either minimum 1/2 inch fasteners or welds, both on 36 inches centers, Provide windlock bars of same material when windlocks are required to meet specified wind load. Top of inner and outer guide angles to be flared outwards to form bellmouth for smooth entry of curtain into guides. Provide removable guide stoppers to prevent over
Overhead Coiling Service Doors 08330-2 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
travel of curtain and bottom bar.
1. Finish: Steel, factory applied thermosetting powder coat. The finish shall be the same Cookson ColorCote finish as indicated in the curtain section.
2. Guide Configuration: Standard Guide Configuration.
C. Counterbalance Shaft Assembly:
1. Barrel: Steel pipe of not less than 4 inches in diameter capable of supporting curtain load with maximum deflection of 0.03 inches per foot (2.5 mm per meter) of width.
2. Spring Balance: Oil-tempered torsion spring assembly designed for proper balance of door to ensure that maximum effort to operate will not exceed 30 lbs (133 N). Provide wheel for applying and adjusting spring torque.
D. Brackets: Fabricate from minimum 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) steel plate and shall be bolted to the wall angle with minimum 1/2 inch fasteners. Steel, factory applied thermosetting powder coat. The finish shall be the same Cookson ColorCote finish as indicated in the curtain section.
E. Hood: 24 gauge galvanized steel, 0.040 inch (1.016 mm) steel with reinforced top and bottom edges. Provide minimum 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) steel intermediate support brackets as required to prevent excessive sag.
1. Finish: ColorCote Coating System to include an ASTM A 653 galvanized base coating, bonderized coating for prime coat adhesion, and factory applied thermosetting powder coating applied with a minimum thickness of 2.5 mils. The color shall be selected by the Engineer and shall be chosen from manufacture's standard color chart.
F. Weatherstripping: Bottom Bar, replaceable, bulb-style, compressible EDPM gasket extending into guides.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Locking: Manual Chain Hoist: Padlockable chain keeper on guide.
B. Operator and Bracket Mechanism Cover: Provide 24 gauge galvanized steel sheet metal cover to provide weather resistance and to enclose exposed moving operating components] at coil area of unit. Finish to match door hood.
Overhead Coiling Service Doors 08330-3 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
2.05 OPERATION
A. Manual Crank Hoist: Provide crank hoist operator including crank gear box, steel crank drive shaft and geared reduction unit. Fabricate gear box to completely enclose operating mechanism and be oil-tight.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates upon which work will be installed and verify conditions are in accordance with approved shop drawings.
B. Coordinate with responsible entity to perform corrective work on unsatisfactory substrates.
C. Commencement of work by installer is acceptance of substrate.
3.02 INSTALLATION, Adjusting, and Cleaning
A. General: Install door and operating equipment with necessary hardware, anchors, inserts, hangers and supports.
B. Follow manufacturer's installation instructions.
C. Adjustment: Following completion of installation, including related work by others, lubricate, test, and adjust doors for ease of operation, free from warp, twist, or distortion.
D. Clean surfaces soiled by work as recommended by manufacturer and remove surplus materials and debris from the site.
3.03 DEMONSTRATION
A. Demonstrate proper operation to State.
B. Instruct State on maintenance procedures.
END OF SECTION
Overhead Coiling Service Doors 08330-4 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
SECTION 09250 – GYPSUM BOARD
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
As specified in Section 01019 - GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Gypsum board on wood framing.
B. Related Work Specified In Other Sections:
1. SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY.
2. SECTION 07920 - SEALANTS.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of SECTION 01300 - SUBMITTALS.
B. Manufacturer's Data: Material description and manufacturer's recommended installation procedures for each material.
C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating fabrications and location of control and expansion joints, including plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachment to adjoining work.
D. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS): Submit MSDS for each product.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Industry Standard: Comply with applicable requirements of GA-216, 'Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board", GA-214, "Recommended Specification: Levels of Gypsum Board Finish", and GA-201, "Using Gypsum Board for Walls and Ceilings", by the Gypsum Association, except where more detailed or more stringent requirements are indicated, including the recommendations of the manufacturer.
B. Transverse Loading: The non-load bearing metal framing shall be capable of carrying a transverse load of 5 psf without exceeding the allowable stress or any deflection of L1360. Increase stud gauge, decrease stud spacing, or provide hidden from view lateral bracing to comply with these requirements at no additional cost to the State.
C. Gypsum Board Terminology: Refer to ASTM C 11, "Terminology Relating to Gypsum and Related Building Materials and Systems", for definition of terms for
Gypsum Board 09280-1 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
gypsum board assemblies not defined in this Section or in referenced standards.
D. VOC content of adhesives shall be less than the current VOC content limits of the South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule 1168, "Adhesive and Sealant Application".
1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver gypsum wallboard materials in sealed containers and bundles, fully identified with manufacturer's name, brand, type, and grade; store in a dry well ventilated space, protected from the weather, under cover and off the ground. Stack gypsum panels flat to prevent sagging. Joint materials shall be stored in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Damaged or deteriorated materials shall be removed from jobsite.
B. Environmental Limitations: Comply with GA-238, "Guidelines for the Prevention of Mold Growth on Gypsum Board", and ASTM C 840, "Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board", requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.
1.06 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
A. Respirators and Other Concerns: Comply with OSHA 29 CFR 1910.134, "Respiratory Protection", ASTM C 930, "Potential Health and Safety Concerns Associated with Thermal Insulation Materials and Accessories", and other Federal, State, and local regulations governing safety. Provide workers with dust/mist respirators, training in their use, and protective clothing as approved by the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH)/Mine Safety and Health Administration (MSHA) when installing insulation or sanding joint compound.
B. Smoking: Do not smoke during installation of blanket insulation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 WOOD PRODUCT QUALITY STANDARDS
Softwood Lumber Standards: Comply with PS 20 and with applicable grading rules of the respective grading and inspection agency for the species and product indicated.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. General: Provide panels in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints and correspond with the applicable support system. All gypsum board shall achieve a score of 10 for mold resistance per ASTM D 3273, "Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber".
Gypsum Board 09280-2 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, "Gypsum Board", 5/8-inch thick, tapered edge type, 48-inches wide, Type "C".
C. Reinforced Tape and Cement: ASTM C 475/C 475M, "Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board", materials for treating joints and fastener heads shall be as manufactured or recommended by the Manufacturer of the wallboard used.
D. Wallboard Accessories: ASTM C 1047, "Accessories for Gypsum Wallboard and Gypsum Veneer Base", Vinyl Corp., Plastic Components Inc., Vinyl Tech or preapproved equal.
1. Standard Corner Bead: Vinyl Corp. Corner Bead CB 125 at all outside corners of wall, ceiling, and soffit as indicated.
2. Casing Trim: Vinyl Corp. "L" Bead SB 50 or 58, "J" Bead MJB 50 or 58, as applicable, or as indicated.
3. Control Joint: Vinyl Corp. CJV 16.
4. Other Accessories: As indicated or necessary for complete installation. 5. All accessories shall be vinyl, PVC, or pre-approved equal.
E. Joint Treatment Materials: ASTM C 475/C 475M; type recommended by manufacturer for the application indicated, except as otherwise noted. Perforated tape, and joint and topping compound, or "all-purpose" compound.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
Examine substrates to which drywall construction attaches or abuts preset hollow metal frames and structural framing, with installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, existence of mold, and other conditions affecting performance of drywall construction. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 840, "Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board", Gypsum Association GA-216, and ASTM C 754 as applicable to the type of substrate and drywall support system indicated.
B. Tolerances:
1. Maximum variation of finish surface from true flatness shall be 1/8-inch in 10-feet in any direction unless specified otherwise.
Gypsum Board 09280-3 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
2. Maximum variation of plumbness of wall shall be 1/8-inch in 10-feet of height.
3. Maximum variation from true position shall be 1/8 inch. Install the work plumb, level, true and straight with no distortions. Install to a tolerance of 1/8-inch in 8-feet for plumb and level units.
C. Gypsum Wallboard, General:
1. Locate exposed end-butt joints as far from center of walls and ceilings as possible.
2. Install exposed gypsum board with face side out. Do not install imperfect, damaged or damp boards. Butt boards together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/1 6-inch open space between boards. Do not force into place.
3. Locate either edge or end joints over supports, except in horizontal applications or where intermediate supports or gypsum board back blocking is provided behind end joints. Position boards so that both tapered edge joints abut and mill-cut or field-cut end joints abut. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints over different studs on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.
4. Attach gypsum panels to steel studs so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.
5. Attach gypsum board to framing and blocking as required for additional support at openings and cutouts.
6. Cover both faces of stud partition framing with gypsum board in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chase walls which are properly braced internally. Except where concealed application is required for sound, fire, air or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 square foot area, and may be limited to not less than 75 percent of full coverage.
7. Isolate perimeter of non-load-bearing drywall partitions at structural abutments. Provide 1/4-inch to 3/8-inch space and trim edge with J-type semi-finishing edge trim. Seal joints with acoustical sealant. Do not fasten drywall directly to stud system runner tracks.
8. Space fasteners in gypsum boards in accordance with referenced standards and manufacturer's recommendations, except as otherwise indicated.
Gypsum Board 09280-4 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
D. Methods of Gypsum Wallboard Application:
1. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member.
2. Single-Layer Application: a. On partitions/walls higher than 8'-1", apply gypsum board vertically (parallel), unless otherwise indicated, and provide sheet lengths which will minimize end joints.
b. On partitions/walls 8'-1" or less in height apply gypsum board horizontally (perpendicular); use maximum length sheets possible to minimize end joints.
3. Single-Layer Fastening Method: Apply gypsum boards to supports by fastening with screws, spaced not to exceed 16-inch centers for walls.
E. Installation of Trim Accessories:
1. General: Where feasible, use the same fasteners to anchor trim accessory flanges as required to fasten gypsum board to the supports. Otherwise, attach trim in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
2. Install corner beads at external corners.
3. Install edge trim whenever edge of gypsum board would otherwise be exposed or semi-exposed. Provide type with face flange to receive joint compound except where semi-finishing type is indicated. Install L-type trim where work is tightly abutted to other work and install special kerf-type where other work is kerfed to receive long leg of L-type trim. Install U-type trim where edge is exposed, revealed, gasketed, or sealant-filled (including expansion joints).
4. Install J or LC-type semi-finishing trim where indicated.
5. Install control joints where indicated or necessary in large ceiling and wall expanses per GA-201. Use door header to ceiling or floor to ceiling in long partitions and wall furring runs and from wall to wall in large ceiling areas. Where joint will be conspicuous, obtain acceptance prior to installation.
3.03 DRYWALL FINISHING
A. General: Apply treatment at gypsum board joints (both directions), flanges of trim accessories, penetrations, fasteners heads, surface defects, and elsewhere in accordance with ASTM C 840 and Gypsum Association GA-216 and GA-214 as required to prepare work for decoration. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surfaces using type of compound recommended by manufacturer.
Gypsum Board 09280-5 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
1. Apply joint tape at joints between gypsum boards, except where a trim accessory is indicated that does not require tape.
2. Apply joint compound in 3 coats (not including prefill of openings in base) and sand between last 2 coats and after last coat. Fastener heads, dents, gouges, and cut-outs shall be filled with joint compound and sanded.
3. Accessories at exposed joints, edges, corners, openings, and similar locations shall be taped, floated with joint compound, and sanded in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and MSDS to produce surfaces ready for gypsum board finishes.
4. Treatment for water-resistant gypsum wallboard shall be as recommended by the gypsum wallboard manufacturer.
B. Finish interior gypsum wallboard by applying the following levels of gypsum board finish in accordance with GA-214.
1. Level 1: For ceiling plenum areas and other concealed areas.
2. Level 2: Where wall panels form substrates for tile.
3. Level 3: For wall surfaces to receive heavy-duty wallcoverings.
4. Level 4: For ceiling surfaces to receive flat paint.
5. Level 5: For wall surfaces to receive satin or semi-gloss paint.
6. Where Level 5 gypsum board finish is indicated, embed tape in joint compound and apply first, fill (second), and finish (third) coats of joint compound over joints, angles, fastener heads, and accessories; and apply a thin, uniform skim coat of joint compound over entire surface. For skim coat, use joint compound specified for third coat, or a product specially formulated for this purpose and acceptable to gypsum board manufacturer. Touch up and sand between coats and after last coat as needed to produce a surface free of visual defects, tool marks, and ridges and ready for decoration.
7. For Level 4 gypsum board finish, embed tape in joint compound and apply first, fill (second), and finish (third) coats of joint compound over joints, angles, fastener heads, and accessories. Touch up and sand between coats and after last coat as needed to produce a surface free of visual defects and ready for decoration.
8. Where Level 3 gypsum board finish is indicated, embed tape in joint compound and apply first and fill (second) coats of joint compound.
9. Where Level 2 gypsum board finish is indicated, embed tape in joint compound and apply first coat of joint compound.
10. Where Level 1 gypsum board finish is indicated, embed tape in joint
Gypsum Board 09280-6 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
compound.
3.04 CLEANING AND REPAIRING
A. After installation and before painting, correct surface damage and defects. Leave surface clean and smooth, satisfactory to the painter. No painting shall be done over gypsum board work until the joints are thoroughly dry. Joints and fastenings are to be invisible after painting.
B. Remove drywall materials from electrical boxes, hardware, fixtures, flooring, and similar items and surfaces not intended to receive drywall materials.
END OF SECTION
Gypsum Board 09280-7 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
SECTION 09900 - PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
As specified in Section 01019 - GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. The work includes painting and finishing of exterior and interior items and surfaces throughout the project, whether scheduled or not, except as otherwise indicated. Painting shall include new work and existing surfaces made bare or damaged during construction. Surface preparation, priming, and coats of paint specified are in addition to shop-priming and surface treatment specified under other Sections of the work and is included in this Section.
B. The work includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and conduits and primed metal surfaces of equipment installed under the electrical work, such as junction boxes, raceways, and cabinets, except as otherwise indicated.
C. "Paint" as used herein means all coating systems materials, including primers, enamels, sealers, stain, varnish, and fillers, and other applied materials whether used as prime, intermediate, or finish coats, except as specifically noted herein.
D. Paint all exposed surfaces whether or not colors are designated in "schedules". Where items or surfaces are not specifically mentioned, paint these the same as adjacent similar materials or areas. If color or finish is not designated, the Engineer will select these from standard colors available for the materials systems specified.
1.03 PAINTING NOT INCLUDED
The following categories of work are not included as part of the field-applied finish work, or are included in other Sections of these specifications.
1. Shop Priming: Unless otherwise specified, shop priming of ferrous metal items is included under the various sections for miscellaneous metal and similar items. Also, for fabricated components such as shop-fabricated or factory-built mechanical and electrical equipment or accessories.
2. Mechanical and Electrical Work: The prime coat for mechanical and electrical work is specified in DIVISION 15- MECHANICAL and DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL, respectively. Finish coats are as specified herein.
3. Pre-Finished Items: Unless otherwise indicated, do not include painting when factory-finishing or installer finishing is specified for such items as (but not limited to) finished mechanical and electrical equipment, including switchgear and distribution cabinets.
Painting 09900-1 Job No. D00CO68CD00CO68A
4. Finished Metal Surfaces: Metal surfaces of anodized aluminum, stainless steel, chromium plate, and similar finished materials will not require finish painting, unless otherwise indicated.
5. Labels: Do not paint over any code-required labels, such as Underwriters' Laboratories, or any equipment identification, performance rating, name, or nomenclature plates.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of SECTION 01300 - SUBMITTALS.
B. Manufacturer's Data: Submit copies of the Manufacturer's Product Data Sheets for the primers, paints, coatings, solvents, sealing and patching materials, sealants and caulking, and other materials being used. Data sheets shall indicate thinning and mixing instructions, required film thickness (mil) and application instructions.
C. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS): Submit copies of the Manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheets for coatings, solvents, and other hazardous materials.
D. Color Samples: Submit the following to the Engineers for acceptance.
1. Four sets of each color finish sample.
2. After the color finish sample has been accepted, one set of color finish samples painted onto 8-1/2 inch x 11-inch cardboard shall be submitted. The cardboard shall be divided into three horizontal strips and painted as follows:
a. Prime 3 strips.
b. First coat bottom 2 strips.
c. Second coat bottom strip.
E. Manufacturer's Certification: Written confirmation by the manufacturer that the applicator is accredited as an approved installer of the specified coating system, and has is experienced with all phases of surface preparation for the products specified.
F. Warranty: Submit warranty as stipulated in item entitled "WARRANTY" hereinbelow.
G. Certifications: Submit copies of asbestos-free, lead-free, zinc-chromate-free, strontium-chromate-free, cadmium-free, and mercury free paint certificates.
Painting 09900-2 Job No. D00CO68CD00CO68A
1.05 ANALYZING AND TESTING
A. All paints and their applied thickness shall be subject to testing whenever the Engineer deems necessary to determine conformation to the requirements of these specifications. Should testing by a laboratory be required, the laboratory shall be selected by the Engineer and the cost of testing shall be borne by the Contractor. However, should test results show that the paint is in compliance with this specifications, the cost will be borne by the Engineer.
B. All rejected material shall be removed from the job site immediately. Surfaces painted with the rejected material shall be redone at no additional cost to the Engineer.
C. Where the required paint thickness is deficient, the affected surface(s) shall be recoated as necessary to provide the required paint thickness at no additional cost to the Engineer.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Painting Terminology: Refer to ASTM D 16, "Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and Applications".
B. Gloss/Sheen Levels: ASTM 0 523, "Specular Gloss", as follows:
Description Units @ 60 degrees Units @85 degrees
Matte or Flat 0 to 5 10max Velvet 0 to 10 10 to 35 Eggshell 10 to 25 10 to 35 Satin 20 to 35 35 min Semi-Gloss 35 to 70 Gloss 70 to 85 High Gloss more than 85
1.06 WARRANTY
A. The Contractor shall warrant that the work performed under this Section conforms to the contract requirements and is free of any defect in the materials used and workmanship performed by the Contractor. Such warranty shall continue for a period of 2 years from the project acceptance date and the Contractor shall remedy any such defect which is discovered during that period at no cost to the State.
B. The Engineer will notify the Contractor in writing within a reasonable time after discovery of any failure or defect.
C. Should the Contractor fail to remedy any failure or defect described in Paragraph A above within 10 working days after receipt of notice thereof, the State shall have the right to repair or otherwise remedy such failure or defect and charge the Contractor for the cost of same.
Painting 09900-3 Job No. D00CO68CD00CO68A
1.07 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Codes: The Contractor shall comply with the State OSHL (Occupational Safety and Health Law) and all pollution control regulations of the State Department of Health.
B. Safety methods used during coating application shall comply with SSPC-PA Guide 3.
C. Protection:
1. Persons:
a. The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to protect public pedestrians, including tenants from injury.
b. The Contractor shall provide, erect, and maintain safety barricades around scaffolds, hoists, and wherever Contractor's operation create hazardous conditions in order to properly protect the public and workmen.
2. Completed Work: The Contractor shall provide all necessary protection for wet paint surfaces.
3. Protective Covering: The Contractor shall provide and install protective covering over equipment, floor, and other areas that are not scheduled for treatment. Protective covering shall be clean, sanitary drop cloth or plastic sheets. Paint applied to surfaces not scheduled for treatment shall be completely removed and surfaces shall be returned to original condition.
4. Safeguarding of Property: The Contractor shall take whatever steps may be necessary to safeguard his work and also the property of the State and other individuals in the vicinity of the work area during the execution of this Contract. Contractor shall be responsible for and make good on any and all damages and for losses to work or property caused by his or his employee's negligence. Where the damaged property cannot be cleaned and restored to its original condition (i.e. prior to being damaged) it shall be replaced with a new product of equal quality. No proration or use of "used" products will be permitted.
5. Fire Safety: The Contractor shall direct his employees not to smoke in the vicinity and to exercise precautions against fire at all times. Waste rags, plastic (polyester sheets), empty cans, etc., shall be removed from the site at the end of each day.
D. Right of Rejection: The Engineer will have the right to reject all work which is not in compliance with the plans and specifications. Rejected work will be redone at no additional cost to the State. In addition, the State will have the right to require the immediate removal of any paint applicator who demonstrates negligence, lack of competence or repeated non-compliance with the contract requirements.
Painting 09900-4 Job No. D00CO68CD00CO68A
E. Sequence of Operations: The sequence of operations shall divide the surfaces into work areas and present a schedule for:
1. Surface preparation and spot prime.
2. Prime coat.
3. First finish coat.
4. Second finish coat.
F. Inspection and Acceptance: The Contractor shall obtain written acceptance from the Engineer upon completion of each phase of work (phases of work are: surface preparation and spot prime; prime; first finish coat; second finish coat) before proceeding into the next phase of work. The Contractor shall give the Engineer one day (24 hours minimum) advance notice of completion of any phase of work for a work area only when he deviates from the previously submitted work schedule. The Contractor shall provide necessary access to areas to be inspected. Failure to obtain acceptance of any phase of work for a work area may result in redoing the operation at no cost to the State.
G. Sample Panels: Prior to commencing with the work, the Contractor shall prepare a sample panel(s) of approximately 10 square feet indicative of the specified surface preparation and required number of paint coats to be applied for acceptance by the Engineer. The intent of this requirement is to ensure adequate coverage/thickness and/or hiding value of the paint and proper hue. The location where the sample panel(s) is to be prepared will be selected by the Engineer.
H. Ventilation of Interior Spaces Following Painting: Following the completion of interior painting and prior to final acceptance, the interior spaces shall be ventilated and allowed to "air-out" to remove paint odors such that no odors exist at State's occupancy date. Where necessary and as deemed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall provide fans to mechanically ventilate the space(s).
1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver paint materials to the job site in original unopened containers with original labels intact.
B. No paint material, empty cans and paint brushes and rollers, drop cloths and rags, may be stored in buildings, but shall be stored in separate storage facilities away from the buildings. Receiving, opening, and mixing of painting materials shall be done in this area.
C. Storage of painting materials on job site will not be permitted.
D. Ensure the safe use of paint materials and the safe disposal of waste, at the end of each work day.
E. Handle manufactured materials as recommended by the manufacturer.
Painting 09900-5 Job No. D00CO68CD00CO68A
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Asbestos Prohibition: All paint shall be asbestos-free.
B. Lead Prohibition: All paint shall be lead-free.
C. Mercury Prohibition: All paint shall be mercury-free.
D. Chromate Prohibition: All paint shall be free of zinc-chromate and/or strontiumchromate.
E. Cadmium Prohibition: All paint shall be cadmium-free.
F. Material shall be equal in quality to that specified under the Schedule of Finishes and any given finish shall be as labeled by one manufacturer. Materials for interior use shall be very low or zero VOC.
G. All materials shall be delivered to the job site in undamaged original containers bearing the manufacturer's label and shall be stored in such a manner as to prevent damage. All rejected materials shall be removed from the job site immediately.
H. Paints shall be as manufactured by Benjamin Moore or other manufacturers pre- approved by the Engineer.
I. Thinning of paint shall be done using material recommended by the manufacturer. Mix proprietary products according to manufacturer's printed specifications. Compound thinner, mineral oil, kerosene, refined linseed oil, or gasoline shall not be used for thinning.
2.02 SCHEDULE OF FINISHES
A. The Schedule of Finishes is made for the convenience of the Contractor and indicates the types and quality of finishes to be applied to the surfaces. Refer to Finish Schedule for symbols indicating location for various finishes. Provide additional systems for surfaces to be painted not listed hereinafter.
B. All paints unless otherwise noted, are the products of Benjamin Moore and Corotech and are so named to establish desired quality and standard of materials. Painting materials, equal to those mentioned by trade name under the various treatments may be used, provided they are pre-approved by the Engineer.
C. Treatments shall be applied on exposed surfaces of designated materials, in conformity with instructions of the paint product used.
Painting 09900-6 Job No. D00CO68CD00CO68A
D. Exterior Painting: Spread rates are approximate.
1. Concrete Masonry:
Prime Coat: N068 Super Spec Masonry Interior/Exterior Acrylic High Build Primer 1.2 mils DFT @ 425 sf/gal Filler Coat (New CMU): 206 Super Spec Masonry Interior/Exterior Hi-Build Block Filler 8.5 mils DFT @ 100 sf/gal 2nd and 3rd Coats: N449 Ultra Spec Ext Gloss Finish 1.5 mils DFT @ 404 sf/gal/coat
2. Galvanized Metal:
Prime Coat: P04 Super Spec HP Acrylic Metal Primer 1.7 mils DFT @ 406 sf/gal or Bulls Eye 1-2-3 Water-Base Primer for All Surfaces 1.5 mils DFT @ 364 sf/gal
2nd and 3rd Coats: N449 Ultra Spec Ext Gloss Finish 1.5 mils DFT @ 404 sf/gal/coat
3. Wood:
Prime Coat: N023 Fresh Start Multi-Purpose Latex Primer 1.2 mils DFT @ 425 sf/gal
2nd and 3rd Coats: N449 Ultra Spec Ext Gloss Finish 1.5 mils DFT @ 404 sf/gal/coat
4. Typical Coating System for Steel: Follow SSPC-SP-1, SSPC-SP-2, or SSPC-SP-3, except blast cleaning is not permitted.
Minimum Time MaximumTime Producer Coat Products DFT (mils) to Recoat to Recoat
Corotech 1st Vi 75* 1.5-2.1 2 hours 2 weeks exterior 3 months interior
Corotech 2nd V1 50 2.2-2. 8 8 hours 4 weeks
Corotech 3rd V500 2.3-3.3 8 hours 3 days
* for galvanized surfaces
Painting 09900-7 Job No. D00CO68CD00CO68A
E. Interior Paints: Use low VOC/low odor paint to maximum extent possible. Spread rates are approximate.
1. Gypsum Wallboard:
Prime Coat: N372 Eco Spec WB Interior Latex Primer 1.2 mils DFT @ 577 sf/gal
2nd and 3rd Coats: N374 Exco Spec WB Interior Latex Eggshell Finish 1.4 mils DFT @ 412 sf/gal/coat
2. Exposed Concrete:
Prime Coat: N372 Eco Spec WB Interior Latex Primer 1.2 mils DFT @ 577 sf/gal
2nd and 3rd Coats: N376 Exco Spec WB Interior Latex Semi-Gloss Finish 1.5 mils DFT @ 428 sf/gal/coat
3. Exposed Concrete Masonry:
Prime Coat: N068 Super Spec Masonry Interior/Exterior Acrylic High Build Primer 1.2 mils DFT @ 425 sf/gal
Filler Coat (New CMU): 206 Super Spec Masonry Interior/Exterior Hi-Build Block Filler 8.5 mils DFT @ 100 sf/gal 2nd and 3rd Coats: N376 Exco Spec WB Interior Latex Semi-Gloss Finish 1.5 mils DFT @ 428 sf/gal/coat
4. Exposed Concrete Masonry with Epoxy Coating:
Prime Coat: V155 Corotech 100% Solids Epoxy Pre-Primer Solid Epoxy Pre-Primer 2.0 mils DFT @ 500 sf/gal
Filler Coat (New CMU): V114 Corotech Waterborne Expoxy Block Filler Block Filler 8.1 mils DFT @ 60 sf/gal 2nd and 3rd Coats: V342 Corotech Pre-Catalyzed Waterborne Epoxy 1.5 mils DFT @ 350 sf/gal/coat
Painting 09900-8 Job No. D00CO68CD00CO68A
5. Wood Surface for Paint:
Prime Coat: N372 Eco Spec WB Interior Latex Primer 1.2 mils DFT @ 577 sf/gal
2nd and 3rd Coats: N376 Exco Spec WB Interior Latex Semi-Gloss Finish 1.5 mils DFT @ 412 sf/gal/coat
2.03 COMPATIBILITY OF PAINTING SYSTEMS AND SUBSTRATES
A. The Contractor shall ensure that painting systems specified are compatible with existing painted surfaces. Alkyd paints shall not be applied over existing latex coating. Alkyd paints shall not be used over cementitious surfaces. Latex paints shall not be applied directly over alkyd paints without proper conditioner and accepted by the Engineer.
B. Field Tests for Alkyd or Latex Paints: The Contractor shall perform the following field tests for compatibility of substrates to new paint systems prior to ordering paint:
1. Latex films will dissolve when wiped with rubbing alcohol; alkyd films will not.
2. When sanded, latex films will "clog" sandpaper; alkyd films will sand clean.
3. Alkyds will soften after applying a 10 percent solution of Drano in water; latex films will not soften.
4. Alkyds will burn when exposed to a flame; latex film will not burn.
5. Paints which do not respond to two or more of these tests are probably epoxy, urethane, or other type of coating.
6. Provide a packaged swab test in accordance with the package directions.
7. Existing paint identified or suspect of having lead-containing paint shall be tested in a manner that does not produce airborne or uncontrolled lead debris.
C. Should there be any discrepancies between the specified Schedule of Finishes and the existing paint systems, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing of any incompatible systems specified and submit a revised Schedule of Finishes for acceptance when necessary. With the acceptance of the revised Schedule of Finishes, the Contractor shall make any corrections and/or revisions necessary to resolve the discrepancies and/or inconsistencies. The Contractor shall not proceed with any painting systems that are incompatible, although specified otherwise, until all incompatible conditions detrimental for the proper application and performance of the painting systems have been corrected. The failures due to the application of the incompatible paint systems shall be corrected at no
Painting 09900-9 Job No. D00CO68CD00CO68A
additional cost to the State. Proceeding with the work shall imply acceptance of the specified Schedule of Finishes and the compatibility with the existing painted surfaces by the Contractor.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. General:
1. Surface preparation shall be in accordance with the Painting and Decorating Contractors of America, "Architectural Specification Manual", methods are applicable to all substrates.
2. Scrub surfaces with stiff nylon bristle brush and T.S.P. solution at rate of 3/4 cup T.S.P. per gallon of warm water to remove accumulated film of wax, oil, grease, smoke, dust, dirt, chalky, or other foreign matter which would impair bond or bleeding through new finish. Thoroughly sponge wipe surfaces with clean water. Allow surfaces to thoroughly dry before priming, painting, calking, or sealing.
a. Following sponge wiping, the surfaces shall be allowed to dry for a minimum of 24 hours.
b. Wood surfaces shall have a maximum moisture content of 12 percent when measured with an electronic moisture meter.
3. Cracks and openings found at joints and where different materials abut each other (e.g. CMU/concrete, CMU or concrete/wood, etc.) shall be sealed with a caulking compound compatible with the substrate and primer/paint. The caulking shall be applied and allowed to set in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and instructions. Caulking is specified in SECTION 07920 - SEALANTS.
B. The painting contractor shall be wholly responsible for the finish of his work and shall not commence any part of it until surfaces are in proper condition. If painting contractor considers any surfaces unsuitable for proper finish of his work, he shall notify the Engineer of this fact in writing and he shall not apply any material until the unsuitable surfaces have been made satisfactory, or until the Engineer has instructed him to proceed. Major defects shall be restored by the proper trades. In general, follow paint manufacturer's directions for surface preparation for the paint to be applied.
C. Remove all hardware, hardware accessories, machined surfaces, plates, lighting fixtures, and similar items in place and not to be finish-painted, or provide surface-applied protection prior to surface preparation and painting operations. Remove, if necessary, for the complete painting of the items and adjacent surfaces. Following completion of painting of each space or area, reinstall the removed items by workmen in the trades involved.
Painting 09900-10 Job No. D00CO68CD00CO68A
D. Puttying of nail holes, cracks, and blemishes shall be done after priming coat has become hard and dry and before second coat is applied.
E. Concrete surfaces shall be wire brushed and cleaned to remove all dust and loose mortar.
F. Alkalinity and Moisture Testing of Cementitious Surfaces:
1. Prior to paint application, interior and exterior concrete and masonry scheduled to receive paint shall be tested to determine the alkalinity level of the surface. Testing shall be performed in strict accordance with the test kit manufacturer's instructions.
2. Perform alkalinity and moisture content tests of surfaces to be painted. Cementitious surfaces shall be cured for not less than 30 days prior to painting, but no less than 14 days and then only if the moisture meter tests indicated moisture of less than 17. Make surface moisture test by use of a commercially available moisture meter. Do not paint over surfaces where moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's printed directions. If surfaces are found to be sufficiently alkaline to cause blistering and burning of finish paint, correct this condition as specified before application of paint. Efflorescence is caused on cementitious surfaces by moisture entering or contained in the substrate. Water-soluble salts are brought to the surface where the water evaporates, leaving a deposit of residual salts, a white, salty deposit. Here they carbonate and destroy the bond within the substrate components, causing the surface to crumble and break away.
3. Where the alkalinity level exceeds the resistance level of the primer proposed for use, the surface shall be neutralized (e.g. muriatic acid wash) as necessary to reduce the levels to within that acceptable by the primer and thoroughly rinsed with clean water.
G. Top, bottom, and side edges of doors to be finished the same as face of doors after they are fitted by the carpenter.
H. Surfaces adjacent to areas being finished shall be protected and left clean of paints, stains, etc. Clean drop cloths shall be used until completion of job. Unprimed galvanized metal shall be washed with a solution of chemical phosphoric metal etch and allowed to dry. Metal surfaces shall be made clean and free of any defects or condition that may produce unsatisfactory finish. Touch-up any chipped or abraded places on surfaces that have been shop coated with the proper primer.
I. Unprimed galvanized metal shall be washed with a solution of chemical phosphoric metal etch and allowed to dry.
J. Metal surfaces shall be made clean and free of any defects or condition that may produce unsatisfactory finish. Touch-up any chipped or abraded places on surfaces that have been shop coated with the proper primer.
Painting 09900-11 Job No. D00CO68CD00CO68A
K. Gypsum Board Surfaces:
1. Surface Cleaning: Surfaces shall be dry. Remove loose dirt and dust by brushing with a soft brush or rubbing with a dry cloth prior to application of the first coat material.
2. Repair of Minor Defects: Prior to painting, repair joints, cracks, holes, surface irregularities, and other minor defects with patching plaster or spackling compound and sand smooth.
L. Plywood and Wood Surfaces:
1. Surface Cleaning: Surfaces shall be free from dust and other deleterious substances and in a condition accepted by the Engineer prior to receiving paint or other finish. Do not use water to clean uncoated wood.
2. Knots and Resinous Wood: Prior to application of paint, treat knots and resinous wood with an application of surface sealer.
3. Open Joints and Other Openings: Fill with whiting putty. Sand smooth after putty has dried.
4. Checking: Where checking of the wood is present, sand the surface, wipe, and apply a coat of pigmented orange shellac. Allow to dry before paint is applied.
3.02 PAINT APPLICATION
A. General:
1. Apply coating materials in accordance with SSPC-PA 1. SSPC-PA 1 methods are applicable to all substrates, except as modified herein. Thoroughly work coating materials into joints, crevices, and open spaces. Touch-up damaged coatings before applying subsequent coats.
2. Materials shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications and the finished surfaces shall be free from runs, sags, drips, ridges, waves, laps, streaks, brush marks, and variations in color, texture, and finish (glossy or dull). The coverage shall be complete and each coat shall be so applied as to produce a film of uniform thickness. No paint, varnish or enamel shall be applied until the preceding coat is thoroughly dry and acceptance.
3. No exterior painting of unprotected surfaces shall be done in rainy, damp weather. Coats shall be applied only to surfaces that are thoroughly dry.
4. Interior areas shall be broom clean and dust free before and during the application of coating material.
5. Mixing shall be done outside the building.
Painting 09900-12 Job No. D00CO68CD00CO68A
B. Application:
1. Paint application shall be by brush or roller painting or combination thereof or as required by manufacturer. Airless spraying is not permitted.
2. Drying Time: Allow time between coats, as recommended by the coating manufacturer, to permit thorough drying. Provide each coat in specified condition to receive the next coat.
3. Primers and Intermediate Coats: Do not allow primers or intermediate coats to dry more than 30 days, or longer than recommended by the manufacturer, before applying subsequent coats. Follow manufacturer's recommendations for surface preparation if primers or intermediate coats are allowed to dry longer than recommended by manufacturers of subsequent coatings. Each coat shall cover the surface of the preceding coat or surface completely, and there shall be a visually perceptible difference in shades of successive coats. 4. Finished Surfaces: Provide finished surfaces free from runs, drops, ridges, waves, laps, brush marks, and variations in selected colors.
C. Colors: Each coat shall be tinted a different shade from the preceding coat. Colors shall be in accordance with the color schedule on the drawings or as selected by the Engineer.
D. Finish Film Thickness: Apply primer, intermediate, and finish coats to not less than 1.5 mils dry film thickness, 4 mils wet unless recommended otherwise in writing by the manufacturer, for each coat and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Verify mil thickness by use of a suitable wet film gauge. Use a Tooke or other dry film gauge to test for total dry film thickness.
3.04 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL WORK
A. Paint visible surfaces of ductwork or plenum spaces, and interior surfaces visible through grilles.
B. Paint shop primed metal surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment with two finish coats of paint to match adjoining wall or ceiling surfaces. Prime unprimed bare metal surfaces with specified prime coat.
C. Stencil all exposed piping with painted black letters indicating the service and with an arrow indicating the direction of flow. Stencil where pipes enter and leave each area and at not over 30-foot intervals within an area. Width of color band, size of legend letters, and position of legend shall conform to the requirements of ASME Al 3.1, "Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems".
3.05 MISCELLANEOUS
A. Installation of Removed Items: After completion of final paint coat, removed items shall be reinstalled.
Painting 09900-13 Job No. D00CO68CD00CO68A
B. At the completion of other trades, touch up damaged surfaces.
C. Extra Paint: The Contractor shall provide extra paint in each of the different colors of exterior and interior paint and stain used for walls, eaves, and ceilings to the Facility Manager upon completion of the project. The paint shall be in unopened one gallon cans and shall be in the quantities listed below:
1. Paint used over large areas, such as the exterior of the building and in several rooms - 5 gallons of each color.
2. Paint used in single room areas and in small areas, such as toilets and doors - 1 gallon of each color.
3.06 CLEAN UP
A. During the progress of the work, all debris, empty crates, waste, drippings, etc., shall be removed by the Contractor and the grounds about the areas to be painted shall be left clean and orderly at the end of each work day.
B. Upon completion of the work, staging, scaffolding, containers, and all other debris shall be removed from the site. All paint, shellac, oil or stains splashed or spilled upon adjacent surfaces not requiring treatment (hardware, fixture, floor) shall be removed and the entire job left clean and acceptable.
END OF SECTION
Painting 09900-14 Job No. D00CO68CD00CO68A
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
SECTION 10200 - METAL WALL LOUVERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
As specified in Section 01019 - GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Provide metal wall louvers complete with hardware, insect and bird screens, and specified trims, and anchors, attachments.
B. Related Work Specified in Other Sections:
1. SECTION 07600 - FLASHING AND SHEET METAL.
2. SECTION 07920 - SEALANTS.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. AMCA 500-L - Laboratory Methods of Testing Louvers for Rating; Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; 2012.
B. AMCA 511 - Certified Ratings Program for Air Control Devices; Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; 2010.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See SECTION 01300 - SUBMITTAL for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data describing design characteristics, maximum recommended air velocity, design free area, materials and finishes.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate louver layout plan and elevations, opening and clearance dimensions, tolerances; head, jamb and sill details; blade configuration, screens, and frames.
D. Samples: Submit 2 samples 2 by 2 inches in size illustrating finish and color of exterior and interior surfaces.
E. Test Reports: Independent agency reports showing compliance with specified performance criteria.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Manufacturer Qualifications: The manufacturer shall have implemented the management of quality objectives, continual improvement, and monitoring of
Metal Wall Louvers 10200-1 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
customer satisfaction to assure that customer needs and expectations are met.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer shall provide a standard limited warranty for louver systems for a period of 1 year from date of installation, no more than 18 months after shipment from manufacturing plant. When notified in writing from the State of a manufacturing defect, manufacturer shall promptly correct deficiencies without cost to the owner.
B. Manufacturer shall provide 20 year limited warranty for fluoropolymer - based finish on aluminum substrates.
1. Finish Coating shall not peel, blister, chip, crack, or check.
2. Chalking, fading, or erosion of finish when measured by the following tests:
a. Finish coating shall not chalk in excess of 8 numerical ratings when measured in accordance with ASTM D4214.
b. Finish coating shall not change color or fade in excess of 5 NBS units as determined by ASTM D2244 and ASTM D822
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 METAL WALL LOUVERS
A. Description: Factory fabricated and assembled, complete with frame, fixed horizontal drainable blades, extruded aluminum construction, mullions, insect and bird screens, and accessories; AMCA Certified under AMCA 511.
B. Manufacturer: Industrial Louvers, Inc. or Pre-Approved Equal.
2.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Free Area: 50 percent, minimum.
B. Static Pressure Loss: 15 inch wg maximum per square foot of free area at velocity of 854 fpm, when tested in accordance with AMCA 500-L.
2.03 FRAME DESCRIPTION
1. Frame: Extruded aluminum, 4 inches deep, channel profile; corner joints mitered and mechanically fastened, with continuous recessed caulking channel each side. Complies with ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M).
2. Metal Thickness: Frame 0.081 inch; blades 0.081 inch.
3. Drainable Blades: Continuous rain stop at front or rear of blade aligned with
Metal Wall Louvers 10200-2 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
vertical gutter recessed into both jambs of frame.
4 Screens:
a. Bird Screen: Aluminum, 1/2 inch by 0.063 inch (12.7 mm by 1.6 mm), expanded, flattened. b. Insect Screen: 18 inch x 14 inch aluminum charcoal mesh 0.011 inch (0.28 mm) diameter wire.
5. Finish: Kynar, finished after fabrication.
6. Color: Selected by Engineer from manufacturer's standard colors.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
Verify that prepared openings and flashings are ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install louver assembly in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Coordinate with installation of flashings by others.
C. Install louvers level and plumb.
D. Align louver assembly to ensure moisture shed from flashings and diversion of moisture to exterior.
E. Secure louver frames in openings with concealed fasteners.
3.03 CLEANING
A. Strip protective finish coverings.
B. Clean surfaces and components.
END OF SECTION
Metal Wall Louvers 10200-3 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
SECTION 10440 - SIGNAGE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Provide signage as shown and as specified herein, including the following: Room Signs
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of SECTION 01300 - SUBMITTALS.
B. Product Data: Include manufacturer's construction details relative to materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes for each type of sign required.
C. Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings for fabrication and erection of signs. Include plans, elevations, and large-scale sections of typical components. Show anchors, layout, and installation details. Provide message list for each sign required, including large-scale details of wording and layout of lettering.
D. Samples: Provide the following samples of each sign component for initial selection of color and surface texture as required and for verification of compliance with requirements indicated.
1. Provide manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual sections of material including the full range of colors available for each material required.
2. Provide a sample panel not less than 3 inches by 3 inches for each material indicated. Include a panel for each color and pattern required. On each panel include a representative sample of the graphic image process required, showing graphic style, and colors and finishes of letters, numbers, braille, and other graphic devices.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Single-Source Responsibility: For each separate type of sign required, obtain signs from one source from a single manufacturer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. General Requirements: Character proportion, color contrast, dimension, depth, and heights of symbols and letters, location, and mounting heights shall be in accordance with the requirements noted in the Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG).
Signage 10440-1 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
B. Anchors and Inserts: Use nonferrous metal or hot-dipped galvanized anchors and inserts for installations as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or lead expansion bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors.
2.02 PLASTIC SIGNS
A. Melamine plastic laminate, approximately 1/8-inch thick, with contrasting core color, non-static, fire-retardant and self-extinguishing. Plastic laminate shall have a contrasting core color and shall be impervious to most acids, alkalies, alcohol, solvents, abrasives and boiling water.
B. Letters, symbols, Grade II Braille, and borders shall be raised. Individual cutout letters and symbols which are applied to the sign plaque shall not be used.
C. Where a white or light colored background (core color) is provided, the background surface shall be coated with white or clear grafitti resistant coating as approved by the signage manufacturer. The coating shall provide a finish which is resistant to pencils, pens, and felt tip markers.
D. Signs shall be mounted with one-way, tamper-proof fasteners. Shields shall be provided as required to suit the mounting conditions. Double-stick tape or adhesives shall not be used.
E. Manufacturers:
1. Best Manufacturing Company. 2. Signs, Letters & Nameplates, Inc. (SL & N) 3. Allen Marking Products, Inc. 4. Pre - Approved Equal
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Installation of all signage shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and approved shop drawings. Installation shall be accomplished by experienced mechanics and in a workmanlike manner.
2. Locate sign units and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of the type described and in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions.
3. Install signs level, plumb, and at the height indicated, with sign surfaces free from distortion or other defects in appearance in accordance with the ADAAG and Children's Design Guidelines.
B. Wall Mounted Panel Signs: Attach panel signs to wall surfaces using one-way,
Signage 10440-2 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
tamper-proof fasteners. Shields shall be provided as required to suit the mounting conditions. Double-stick tape or adhesives shall not be used.
3.02 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
At completion of the installation, clean soiled sign surfaces in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Protect units from damage until acceptance by the Engineer. Remove all tools, equipment, debris, and surplus materials.
END OF SECTION
Signage 10440-3 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
SECTION 10526 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
As specified in Section 01019 - GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS.
1.02 Summary
Work includes, but not limited to, fire extinguishers and accessories.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of SECTION 01300 - SUBMITTALS.
B. Product Data: Provide extinguisher operational features.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A. General: Comply with product requirements of NFPA 10 and applicable codes, whichever is more stringent.
B. Dry Chemical Type Fire Extinguishers:
1. Class: C.
2. Size: 10 pound (4.54 kg)
3. Wall Hung Fire Extinguisher Basis of Design: Model 10HABC, Oval Fire Products.
a. Height: 23 inches (58 cm)
b. Vessel Width: 8 inches (21 cm)
c. Width Overall: 9 inches (23 cm)
d. Depth: 3.5 inches (9 cm)
4. Manufacturer: Oval Fire Products or Pre - Approved Equal.
2.02 ACCESSORIES
Extinguisher Brackets: Manufacturer's standard enamel coated metal.
Fire Extinguishers 10526-1 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Secure rigidly in place.
END OF SECTION
Fire Extinguishers 10526-2 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL
SECTION 15400 - PLUMBING
- GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Pipe materials and fittings; plumbing specialties; plumbing fixtures and trim; plumbing equipment for plumbing systems for domestic water shall comply with this section.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. DIVISION 2 - SITE CONSTRUCTION.
B. DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE.
1.03 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
A. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code
B. ANSI/NFPA 72 - National Fire Code
C. ASTM - American Society for Testing Materials
D. UL - Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc.
E. UBC - Uniform Building Code
F. UPC - Uniform Plumbing Code
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of SECTION 01300 - SUBMITTALS.
B. Note on drawings any deviations from contract plans or specifications. Access for equipment and proper fit for its operation and maintenance shall be Contractor’s responsibility.
C. Product Data:
1. Plumbing Pipe and Fittings.
2. Pipe Supports.
D. Shop Drawings: Piping Plans and Diagrams.
Plumbing 15400-1 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
1.05 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Submit under provisions of DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.
B. Include actual locations and routing of equipment, piping, valves, and accessories.
C. Final observation will not be made until these approved as-built drawings have been received by the Engineer.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum fifteen years documented experience.
B. Installer: Company specializing in installing the products specified in this section with minimum fifteen years documented experience.
1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to REFERENCES AND STANDARDS hereinabove.
B. Conform to all Rules, Ordinances, and Regulations of the State of Hawaii, County of Honolulu.
C. Furnish products listed and classified by UL and FM as suitable for purpose specified and indicated.
1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect all work and material from damage by work or workers.
B. Be responsible for work and equipment until finally inspected, tested, and accepted. Protect work against theft or damage, and carefully store material and equipment received on site that is not immediately installed. Close all open ends of work with temporary covers or plugs during storage and construction to prevent entry of foreign objects.
1.09 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
Drawings show the general arrangement of all piping; however, where local conditions necessitate a rearrangement, Contractor shall prepare and submit for approval, drawings of the proposed rearrangement. Because of the small scale of drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, and accessories which may be required.
Plumbing 15400-2 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
1.10 WARRANTY
Provide manufacturer’s warranty against defective materials and workmanship for a period of one year from the date of acceptance of the Project by the State. This warranty shall include any motor and electrical components for any equipment furnished under this Section. This warranty shall also provide that factory-trained servicemen shall be locally available to perform service on the equipment.
Bidder shall state direct address of this service station. If alternate equipment is proposed and furnished it does not conform to the detailed specifications, it shall be removed from the job site and be replaced with the specified item at the expense of the Contractor.
- PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
As indicated or scheduled on Drawings, and as specified in this Section.
2.02 SUBSTITUTIONS
Under provisions of DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.
2.03 MATERIALS
Asbestos and Lead Prohibition: No asbestos and/or lead-containing materials or equipment, other than lead flashing, shall be used under this section. The Contractor shall ensure that all materials and equipment incorporated in the project shall be free of lead and asbestos.
2.04 WATER PIPES
A. Water piping shall be Type “L” copper pipe. Fittings shall be copper cast bronze. Joints in copper piping shall be sweat soldered with lead-free 95-5 or Victaulic grooved system. Grooved couplings shall be angled bolt pad type. No tongue and recess type couplings will be allowed. No flaring of copper tube to IPS will be allowed. All gaskets to be of the pre-lubricated type. Dielectric unions shall be used where indicated or where copper is connected to ferrous pipe and protected with felt and two layers of electrical tape where copper comes into contact with ferrous metal.
B. Water piping below ground shall be Type “K” copper pipe. Fitting and installation shall be as specified above.
2.05 HOSE BIBB
Watts HY-430.
Plumbing 15400-3 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
2.06 BALL VALVE
Watts LFB-0680 or Victaulic style 608N butterfly valve.
2.07 WATER HAMMER ARRESTOR
J. R. Smith Figure 5005, 5010, or 5020, sized to suit number of fixtures being served.
- EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
Examine the surfaces and conditions under which the work of this section will be performed. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the work have been corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Investigate the Contract Documents and make proper provisions to avoid interferences or construction delays. Determine the exact route of each pipe. Make off-sets and changes in direction required to maintain proper head room or pitch or to accommodate the structure and the work of other trades. Furnish other trades with information to properly locate and size openings in the structure required for this work. Furnish anchor bolts, sleeves, inserts, and supports required for this work.
B. Should it appear that any portion of the system has been omitted from the plans, the Contractor shall call the attention of the Engineer to such apparent omission one week before date of bid opening so that corrections may be made. Otherwise, the Contractor shall furnish and install, in a manner corresponding with the rest of the work, as if the same were specified and specifically provided for.
3.03 INSTALLATION AND REQUIREMENTS
A. Perform work using personnel skilled in the trade involved. Provide competent supervision. Furnish new equipment, materials, and accessories bearing the manufacturer’s identification and conforming to recognized commercial standards. Provide guard around all exposed moving machinery parts and around high-temperature equipment and materials.
B. When exposed to weather, provide a weather-protected enclosure around electrical equipment, controls, and other items that are not satisfactorily protected. Provide access panels for concealed items provided under this section that require maintenance, adjustment, or inspection.
Plumbing 15400-4 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
3.04 GENERAL WORKMANSHIP
All workmanship shall be of the highest standard. The plumbing system shall be laid out to ensure a neat, systematic, and orderly arrangement of all work. Vertical lines shall be plumb and lines that are grouped shall be parallel and as direct as possible. Galvanized sheet metal thimbles shall be provided where pipes pass through masonry and cutting shall be avoided as far as possible. Exposed piping, where occurring, shall be run parallel with walls.
3.05 EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, AND CONCRETE WORK
A. Trenches for all underground pipe lines shall be excavated to the required depths. The bottoms of trenches shall be tamped hard and graded to secure the required fall. Bell holes shall be excavated so that pipe will rest on solid ground for its entire length. Rock, where encountered, shall be excavated to a depth 6 inches below the bottom of the pipe and rock surface shall be filled with sand.
B. After pipe lines have been tested, inspected, and approved, prior to backfilling, forms shall be removed and the excavation shall be cleaned of trash and debris. Materials for backfilling shall consist of the excavation except adobe, or borrow of sand, gravel, or other materials approved by the Engineer, and shall be free of trash, lumber, or other debris. Backfill shall be placed in horizontal layers not exceeding 9 inches in thickness, and properly moistened to approximate optimum conditions.
C. Each layer shall be compacted by hand, machine tampers, or other suitable equipment, to a density which will prevent excessive settlement or shrinkage. Backfill shall be brought to a suitable elevation above grade to provide for anticipated settlement and shrinkage thereof. The backfill shall be tamped to density equal to the surrounding earth under concrete floor and paving. Concrete work shall conform to DIVISION 2 - SITE CONSTRUCTION.
3.06 FIXTURE PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Inspect all pipe inside and outside. Remove interior obstructions and ream out pipe ends. Tool markings on polished fittings are not acceptable. Cut pipe accurately so that it can be worked into place without springing or forcing. Install pipes parallel to the walls of the structure and plumb.
B. Make changes in direction and size with fittings. Install valves with stems above horizontal. Provide proper support and adequate provisions for expansion, contraction, slope, and anchorage. Provide dielectric unions where copper tubing connects to steel pipe. Wrap pipe or tubing with ¼-inch thick felt, secured with tape, where they contact other materials. Have piping tested, inspected, and approved before it is furred in, buried, or otherwise hidden. Provide standard weight galvanized steel pipe sleeves where water pipes pass through structure, sufficiently large to provide ¼-inch clearance around pipe.
Plumbing 15400-5 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
C. Wrap pipe with polyethylene tape where it passes through sleeve and when it contacts concrete or masonry. Caulk watertight around pipes passing through sleeves. Grout with fireproof material around all pipe penetrations through slabs and walls full length of penetration.
D. Provide chrome-plated brass escutcheons, set tight on the pipe and to the wall where pipes are exposed in finished areas. Provide clamping collar or membrane flange where pipe penetrates waterproof membrane. Perform all welding using qualified welders in accordance with American National Standards Institute’s Code B31.1.
3.07 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. No pipe shall be closed up, furred in, butted in, or otherwise hidden until it has been inspected, tested, and approved by the proper authorities.
B. All piping shall be inspected inside and out before installation and no obstructions shall be allowed. Pipe ends shall be taper reamed to full I.D. and all burrs removed.
C. All exposed piping shall be carefully handled to avoid excessive tool marking and polished fittings shall be handled with extra care using friction wrenches so that tool marks do not show. All exposed piping shall be in one length where possible. Fittings shall be in walls or in furred pass.
D. Underground pipes passing through walls to other areas below grade shall be provided with pipe sleeves and be made watertight at the sleeves. Provide sheet metal thimbles where pipes pass through structural floors or non-structural members, steel pipe sleeves where pipes pass through structural members and concrete wall. Anchor piping in building with approved clamps or adjustable hangers spaced in accordance with Section 316 of the 2006 UPC.
E. Hangers and supports shall be placed at each offset or change in direction, at the ends of branches over five feet in length, at riser pipes and along piping as necessary to prevent sags, bends, or vibration. Horizontal pipe support spacing:
1. Screwed Pipe a. 3/4 inch and smaller: 10 feet
2. Copper Pipe a. 1 1/2 inch and smaller: 6 feet
3.08 PIPE SYSTEM SUPPORTS
A. Pipe supports: Factory-fabricated. Provide concrete inserts, beam clamps, channel framing, hangar rods, and accessories required for proper pipe support. Ramset or explosive type anchors may not be used without written permission from the Engineer. Support underground piping on firm soil along its entire length. Where rocks are encountered, have trench excavated to a minimum over
Plumbing 15400-6 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
depth of four inches and backfilled with granular moist earth, thoroughly tamped. Materials used for backfilling over piping shall be granular earth, free from debris and stones. The Engineer’s representative may reject any materials which he considers unsuitable for fill.
B. Provide a minimum of two feet of cover for all pipes.
C. Support steel and copper pipe at maximum spacing of 6-feet for pipe sizes 1 1/2 inch in diameter and smaller, 10 feet for pipes 2 inches to 4 inches in diameter. Groups of lines may be supported from steel channel with pipe clamp.
3.09 WATER PIPING SYSTEM
A. Secure each water line where it penetrates partitions to serve hose bibbs and similar items. Wrap all lines passing through concrete with polyethylene tape. Install unions or flanges at all valves, equipment, and system specialties. Set hose bibbs 18 inches above finished grade, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Provide water hammer arrestors as indicated on the plans and on all water lines serving fixtures using flush valves or hose bibbs, sized and located in accordance with the PDI Standard WH-201 for the total number of fixture units connected to the branch line. Provide access door for concealed arrestors.
C. Provide concrete thrust blocks at each change of direction in underground water piping system.
3.10 CUTTING AND REPAIRING
The work shall be carefully laid out in advance, and any excess cutting of construction will not be permitted. Cutting shall be carefully done and damage to buildings, piping, wiring, or equipment as a result of cutting for installation shall be repaired by skilled mechanics of the trade involved, at no additional cost to the State.
3.11 PROTECTION TO FIXTURES, MATERIALS, AND EQUIPMENT
Pipe openings shall be closed with caps or plugs during installation. Fixtures and equipment shall be tightly covered and protected against dirt, water, and chemical or mechanical injury. Upon completion of all work, the fixtures, materials, and equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned, adjusted, and operated.
3.12 CHLORINATION
Water lines shall be sterilized with chlorine before acceptance of the work. Dosage of the chlorine shall be not less than 50 ppm. Chlorinating material shall be introduced into the water lines in a manner approved by the Engineer. After a contact period of not less than eight hours, the system shall be flushed with clean water until the residual chlorine is not greater than 0.2 ppm. All valves in the lines being sterilized shall be opened and closed several times during the contact
Plumbing 15400-7 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
period. A certificate shall be furnished to the Engineer evidencing proper performance of sterilization.
3.13 TESTING AND CLEANUP
Water piping shall be tested at 150 psi for 15 minutes without leaking. Furnish all equipment for the tests and pay for all costs of repairing any damages resulting from the tests. Adjust such systems until they are approved. Tests shall be performed in the presence of, and to the satisfaction of, the State’s representative and the inspector of the official agency involved.
3.14 OPERATION TEST
At completion, operate all plumbing systems for a period of at least two days of eight hours minimum to demonstrate fulfillment of the requirements. During this time all adjustments shall be made to the equipment until the entire system is in satisfactory operating condition, including the location of main and branch shut- off valves.
3.15 FINAL OPERATION AND INSTRUCTIONS
Upon completion of the installation and after operation test and final acceptance, at a mutually agreed time, the Contractor shall place for a competent person (or persons) at the building who shall operate the systems for a period of two 8-hour days instructing the State’s personnel in all details of operation and maintenance, including the location of main and branch shut-off valves.
END OF SECTION
Plumbing 15400-8 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
SECTION 16000 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Basic requirements applicable to all electrical work.
B. Grounding and bonding; hangers and supports; electrical testing, cables and conductors; raceway and boxes; wiring connections; distribution equipment; panelboards; wiring devices; luminaires; accessories.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
Refer to SECTION 15400 - PLUMBING.
1.03 REFERENCES
Standards: Conform to the latest editions of the National Electrical Code (NFPA 70), National Electrical Safety Code, Life Safety Code (NFPA 101), ANSI, NEMA, and the ordinances, rules and regulations of State of Hawaii.
1.04 SYSTEMS DESCRIPTION
A. Scope: Furnish all labor and materials required to complete all electrical work as indicated on the drawings and/or specified herein:
1. Power distribution system, including utility service entrance and support structures, panelboards, feeders, and branch circuits, wiring devices and connections to equipment furnished by others.
2. Lighting and control system, including luminaires, branch circuits, switches, controls and wiring.
B. Contract Drawings: These specifications are accompanied by plans and diagrammatic electrical layouts showing the approximate location of panels and other equipment. Before installing, study adjacent details, and make the installation in the most logical manner. Any device may be relocated within 10 feet before installation at the direction of the Engineer, whose decision shall be final.
C. Symbols: The standard electrical symbols together with special symbols, notes, schedules and instructions shown on the drawings indicate the work and equipment required and are all to be included as a part of these specifications.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of SECTION01300 - SUBMITTALS. Submittals shall contain the Contractor’s stamp and signature indicating the submittal’s
Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 16010-1 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
compliance with the contract documents. Submittals that fail to provide sufficient information for evaluation, or that do not bear the Contractor’s stamp, will be returned for re-submittal without extensions of time or waiver. Submit shop drawings, or catalog cuts, of the following equipment:
1. Wire and cable.
2. Circuit breakers.
3. Panelboards and accessories.
4. Devices and outlet assemblies.
5. Lighting fixtures.
6. Accessories.
B. Shop drawings and catalog cut submittals processed by the Engineer are not Change Orders. The purpose of the submittals by the Contractor is to demonstrate understanding of the design concept, by indicating which equipment and material he intends to furnish and install, and by detailing the fabrication and installation methods he intends to use.
C. Identify deviations from Contract Documents, including variations and limitations. Review of a submittal does not constitute acceptance of deviations from the Contract Documents, unless such deviation is clearly indicated as such on the submittal, and specifically accepted as such.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. For actual fabrication, installation and testing of the work of this section, use only thoroughly trained and experienced workers completely familiar with items required and with manufacturers' recommended methods of installation. In acceptance or rejection of installed work, no allowance will be made for lack of skill on part of workers. Use all means necessary to protect the materials of this Section before, during, and after installation and to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades.
B. Obtain and pay for the electrical permit as required by local laws and rules. Arrange for all work to be inspected by the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) as it progresses. Pay all inspection fees and deliver certificates of completion and inspection to the State before final payment is made. Include cost of permit and inspection fees in the quoted price for the installation.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Take delivery of all materials and protect them from damage.
B. Store materials in a dry place. Do not expose equipment and wire to moisture of any kind. Do not install equipment and wire that has been exposed to moisture.
Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 16010-2 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
1.08 PROJECT SITE CONDITIONS
A. Visit the project site and become familiar with field conditions including accessibility and physical obstructions. Bid submission indicates familiarity with, and acceptance of, field conditions.
B. Separate Sections cover site, architectural and mechanical Work. Study the complete set of contract documents to become familiar with the entire Project including site, architectural and structural features and systems as related to Work in this Division. Special attention should be paid to Divisions featuring equipment requiring electrical interface including Owner-furnished equipment, food service equipment, elevator equipment, and mechanical systems (plumbing, hvac, fire sprinkler, controls).
C. Should there be omissions or discrepancies in the plans and specifications, or discrepancies from actual site conditions, bring them to the attention of the Engineer ten working days in advance of the date of bid opening so that corrections or clarifications can be made.
D. Install Work in locations shown on Drawings, unless prevented by Project conditions. Coordinate work with that of other trades. Verify that adjacent and related construction conforms to contract documents.
E. If Project conditions, including changes initiated by other trades or discovery of conditions unknown at time of bid, require unspecified materials and methods or rearrangement of Work, prepare drawings showing proposed changes to meet Project conditions. Obtain permission of the State before proceeding.
1.09 WARRANTY
All work and materials executed under this Section shall be under warranty to be free from defects of materials and workmanship for one year from date of final acceptance of project as a whole. Should any equipment or material fail within this period, replace or repair that item at no cost to the State for material and/or services, if such is due to faulty workmanship or quality of material furnished.
1.10 SYSTEM STARTUP, OWNERS INSTRUCTIONS, COMMISSIONING
As-Built Drawings: Keep at the job site a complete, neat and accurate record of all approved deviations from the contract drawings, shop drawings and specifications, indicating the work as actually installed. Record these changes on prints of the drawings affected and the shop drawings. Above reference to deviation shall not be construed to allow deviations without prior approval. Show actual routing of all conduits larger than 2 inches. Submit as-builts prior to final acceptance and final payment.
Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 16010-3 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer’s names and catalog numbers indicate standards of design and quality required. In case of obsolescence, supersede, or error in catalog number, the associated description and intent implied by the application shall govern.
B. Failure to obtain approval of substitute materials/manufacturers prior to bidding in accordance with the General Conditions shall mean that materials and manufacturers as specified shall be provided.
2.02 SUBSTITUTIONS
C. Conform to DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. Conformance to construction documents is the responsibility of the Contractor, regardless of approval.
D. Layout on drawings, including space allotted for clearances, access, etc., is based on performance and physical attributes of equipment specified and/or scheduled on plans. Coordinate with other systems, subsystems and trades as required when using substituted materials or equipment.
E. If the use of substitute materials or equipment requires alternate arrangement of equipment, fixtures, devices, wiring or accessories, prepare drawings showing proposed changes. Obtain permission of the Engineer before proceeding.
F. If the use of substitute materials or equipment results in different performance than that provided by the specified materials or equipment, adjust Work as required to provide parity performance, at no additional cost to the State. Obtain permission of the Engineer before proceeding.
G. If the use of substitute materials or equipment results in an increase in the cost, including changes to the Work of other trades, pay for any said increase in cost.
2.03 MATERIALS
A. All materials shall be new and of the best quality available in their respective kinds, free from all defects, comply with applicable provisions of ASTM Standards, NEC Articles 90-6 and 110-3. Those items listed by the Underwriters' Laboratories shall bear "UL" label of approval and shall be tested by a nationally recognized electrical testing laboratory and shall be of the make and types specified or approved equal.
B. Raceways:
1. Rigid galvanized steel conduit (RGS) - Rigid steel, hot-dipped galvanized inside and outside, zinc-coated, round bore for use with threaded fittings, 1/2 inch minimum diameter, except as noted. Other sizes to conform to
Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 16010-4 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
NEC requirements, based on THW wires. Manufacture and install according to NEC Article 346. Aluminum conduits are prohibited. 2. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) - Zinc coated or galvanized, round bore, thin walled metal tubing, 1/2 inch minimum diameter. Manufacture and install according to NEC Article 348.
3. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit - Flexible steel, zinc-coated, jacketed with high-density polyethylene or polyvinyl-chloride jacket. Use with factory approved fittings. Manufacture and install according to NEC Article 351.
4. Flexible Metallic Conduit - Flexible galvanized steel or aluminum. Use with factory approved fittings. Manufacture and install according to NEC Article 350.
5. PVC Conduit - Schedule 40 Polyvinyl Chloride. Use with factory approved fittings. Do not use water pipe for conduit.
C. Wires: All conductors #8 and larger shall be stranded copper, 600 volt insulation type XHHW. All conductors smaller than #8 shall be solid copper, 600-volt insulation, type THHN/THWN.
D. Pull boxes: Provide junction and pull boxes where required by the NEC. Boxes shall be code gauge steel with screw cover and rain-tight construction when installed in locations exposed to rain.
E. Enclosures: Enclosures for switches shall be NEMA type, fabricated from galvanized steel, prime painted and enamel finished according to NEMA specifications.
F. Outlet boxes shall be of size and type best suited to particular use or location but in any case shall be of sufficient size to contain without crowding all conductor and connections that may be required in any outlet box. Manufacture and install according to NEC Article 351. Concealed boxes shall be pressed from NEC gauge steel; galvanized 4 inch square x 1-1/2 inches deep minimum. Boxes in interior locations shall be code gauge galvanized steel, not less than 14 gauge, not less than minimum size required by Code.
G. Hardware, Supports, Backing, Etc.: All hardware, supports, backing, and other accessories necessary to install electrical equipment shall be provided. Wood materials shall be "wolmanized" treated against termites; iron or steel materials shall be galvanized for corrosion protection, and non-ferrous materials shall be brass or bronze. All wood screws shall be brass or galvanized steel.
H. Other Materials: All other materials not specifically described but required for a complete and operable electrical installation, shall be new, first quality of their respective kinds, and as selected by Contractor subject to approval by the Engineer.
2.04 DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT
Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 16010-5 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
A. Panelboards: Copper bus including ground bus, with bolt-on breakers, AIC rating and number of circuits as shown on schedules. Series rating is acceptable. Siemens-ITE, Square D, Cutler-Hammer, General Electric, or pre-approved equal.
B. Metering Apparatus: Conform to utility company requirements; provide meter socket and related raceway.
C. Enclosed Circuit Breakers: General duty, voltage and rating as indicated on Drawings. Provide NEMA 1 circuit breakers indoors, NEMA 3R circuit breakers outdoors. Siemens-ITE, Square D, Cutler-Hammer, General Electric, or pre- approved equal.
2.05 DEVICES
H. Specification grade 20 ampere 125 volt grounding type unless noted otherwise. Nylon face or toggle, side and back wired. Back wired devices shall utilize the side screw terminals to tighten the wires inside the device. “Poke-in” type back- wired devices that do not utilize screws to connect the wires to the device are prohibited. Hubbell, Leviton, Pass & Seymour or approved equal.
I. GFCI Receptacle: Convenience receptacle with integral ground fault circuit interrupter to meet regulatory requirements.
J. Weatherproof Cover Plate: Gasketed, with hinged gasketed device cover, weatherproof while in use.
2.06 LUMINAIRES
Luminaires shall be as indicated on the luminaire schedule. Luminaires subject to water spray shall bear a wet location label. Luminaires in outdoor soffits, etc. not subject to direct water spray shall be damp location label.
2.07 ACCESSORIES
Lighting relay panel: Provide as shown on plans.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine actual field conditions and make adjustments as required for the construction of the project per all Codes and standards.
B. Accuracy of Data: The data indicated on drawings and in specifications are as exact as could be secured but their absolute accuracy is not guaranteed. Exact locations, distances, levels and other conditions will be governed by job decisions of the Engineer.
Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 16010-6 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Perform all work in accordance with equipment manufacturer's requirements and applicable NFPA standards. Install equipment and materials in a workmanlike manner conforming to recognized commercial standards.
B. Coordination: Coordinate installation of electrical items with existing building elements. Where electrical items are shown in conflict with locations of structural members and mechanical or other equipment, furnish and install required supports and wiring to clear encroachments.
C. Installation of Conductors: Install all conductors in conduit.
D. Miscellaneous Details: Cut, core and patch as required to install electrical system. Repair any surface damaged or marred by notching, coring or any other process necessary for installation of electrical work. Cutting, repairs and refinishing shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. The Engineer will determine the need for remedial work. If attributable to poor coordination and workmanship, reconstruction will be performed to the satisfaction of the Engineer, at no cost to the State.
3.03 CONSTRUCTION
A. Construction Methods:
1. Comply with local ordinances and regulations. Workmanship is subject to approval of Engineer who shall be afforded every opportunity to determine skill and competency. Concealed work may be re-opened at random during formal inspection by Engineer without additional charge to the State.
2. Conform to construction practices as recommended by American Electricians Handbook by Croft (latest edition) Edison Electric Institute, National Electrical Code, National Electrical Safety Code and applicable instructions of manufacturers of equipment and materials supplied for project.
B. Raceway and Fittings:
1. Install all new wiring in conduit.
2. Conduits shall be of ample size to allow drawing in or removing of wires and cables without undue strain, and suitable bushings shall be installed on each end of every run of conduit where wires or pull strings are installed.
3. Conduit system shall be continuous from fitting to fitting so that electrical continuity is obtained between all conduits of the system.
4. Cut raceways square, and ream inner edges. Adjoining lengths shall butt together evenly in couplings to provide passage for installing conductors. Clean factory threads with die before installation of conduit. Use of running
Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 16010-7 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
threads not permitted. Where conduits cannot be joined by standard threaded couplings, use approved watertight conduit unions.
5. Avoid bends, offsets, and crossing of conduits shall be wherever possible. When necessary make bends and offsets with hickey or conduit bending machine. Do not use vise or pipe tee. Flattened or crushed conduit shall not be acceptable. Make bends so that interior cross-sectional area will not be reduced. Radius of curve of inner edge of field bend shall be not less than ten times internal diameter of raceway.
6. Cut raceways square, and ream inner edges.
7. Mount raceway free from other pipes, valves, or mechanical equipment. Keep all conduits at least six inches away from the covering on hot water pipes.
8. Fish wires, cords, strings, chains or the like shall not be placed or inserted in the conduit system during installation of the conduits.
9. Run exposed raceways parallel with or at right angles to structural or architectural elements
10. Securely fasten raceways with galvanized pipe straps, or with approved beam clamps or approved single or gang pipe hangers spaced not more than 7 feet apart, as conditions require. Vertical runs shall be supported at intervals not exceeding 5 feet by approved clamp hangers. Conduit runs with one 90-degree bend or equivalent, 150 feet maximum length, shall be permitted without a pullbox. Support raceways from structure. Do not support raceways from or on mechanical pipes, ducts or ceiling suspension wires.
C. Conductor Color - Coding: Conform to NFPA 70.
D. Conductor Splicing:
1. Wires shall be formed neatly in enclosures and boxes. Conductors, #10 and smaller shall be made secure with wirenut suitable for the purpose. Conductors larger than #10 shall be spliced using Hypress fittings. Split bolt connectors are prohibited.
2. Insulate all splices in conductors larger than #10 with a minimum of two half-lapped layers of vinyl-plastic electrical tape or use heat shrinkable tubing that is U.L. listed for the purpose.
3. Splice insulation shall be 200 percent in thickness of original wire insulation and of same electrical and mechanical characteristics.
4. Insulate wires #10 and smaller using spring connectors similar to Ideal Wing Nuts. Conductors shall not be twisted prior to the installation of the spring connector. The plastic body of the connector shall cover all bare
Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 16010-8 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
conductor. Tape shall not be used in conjunction with spring connectors to make up for improper installation of the connector.
E. Lubricants: Chemically neutral to insulation and sheath. Sherwin-Williams "flaxsoap." Apply liberally during pulling. Other means of lubricating allowed with written approval of Engineer.
F. Pulling Conductors: Mechanical means for pulling to be torque-limiting type and not to be used for No. 2 AWG and smaller wires. Pulling tensions shall not exceed manufacturer's recommendations. Form neatly in enclosure for minimum of crossovers.
G. Grounding: All metallic enclosures, raceways, and electrical equipment shall be grounded according to requirements of National Electrical Code, Article 250 and this specification. All circuits shall contain a green grounding conductor. All grounding conductors shall be run together with circuit conductors.
H. Finishing: Patch, repair and restore all structural and architectural elements cut or drilled for installation of electrical system. Drilling, cutting, patching, repairing and restoring shall be finished by suitable trades subject to approval of the Engineer.
I. Attach electrical equipment to wood by wood screws, and attach to concrete by embedded or expansion inserts and bolts. Use power-driven charge with approval only. Close unused knockouts on boxes or enclosures with metal cap. Powder actuated fasteners shall not be used on pre-cast concrete. Do not use powder-activated fasteners to attach enclosures and boxes to the building.
J. Wipe clean all exposed raceways and enclosures with rag and solvent. Paint all exposed raceways and enclosures to match existing building or structural finish to protect them from corrosion. Factory finished enclosures shall not be painted. Identify switches, circuit breakers, junction boxes, and equipment with engraved plastic nameplates on cover or door.
K. Connect circuits to circuit assignments shown on drawings. Provide neatly typewritten circuit directory for all panelboards. Circuit directory shall indicate location of loads served by each circuit. For example: "LTS - CONFERENCE” or “RCPTS - OFFICE."
L. Mark all control wires with wire markers attached to conductors in all enclosures.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing and Inspections: After the installation has been completed, and at such time as the Engineer may direct, conduct an operating test for approval. The equipment shall be demonstrated to operate in accordance with the requirements of this section of the specifications. Furnish the necessary instruments and personnel required for the test.
1. All wiring shall be tested to insure proper operation according to functions specified. All systems shall test free from short circuits and grounds, shall
Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 16010-9 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C
be free from mechanical and electrical defects. All systems shall show proper neutral connections.
2. Interior installation, 600 volts and less shall be tested for insulation resistance after all wiring is completed and ready for connection to equipment. With a 500 volt megger, measure and record the insulation resistance from phase to phase, and phase to neutral.
3. Proper operation of all electrical equipment shall be demonstrated at request of Engineer during final inspection.
B. Re-tape splices which have been bared for inspection. Test all portions of the electrical systems installed for proper operation and freedom from accidental grounds. All tests shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
C. Wherever test or inspection reveals faulty equipment or installation, the Contractor shall take corrective action, at his own expense repairing or replacing equipment or installation as directed.
D. If the Engineer shall discover any of the following errors, the Contractor, at his own expense, shall inspect all similar portions of the entire job, taking the necessary or directed remedial action:
1. Loose or improper connections in boxes or panels.
2. Impaired clearance of electrical equipment.
3. Improper installation and finish of trims, reflectors, coverplates, doors, etc.
3.05 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust boxes to be flush with the finished wall surface and devices adjusted to be square with the finished floor or adjacent wall.
B. Trims, plates, devices, etc. that cannot be adjusted to be flush or square or without gaps shall be torn out and reinstalled at no additional cost.
3.06 CLEANING A. Clean all debris, insulation pieces, cut wire, and extra screws from all electrical enclosures.
B. Upon completion of all installation, thoroughly inspect all exposed portions of the electrical installation and completely remove all exposed labels, soil, markings and foreign material.
C. All existing materials removed in the course of construction become the property of the State and shall be removed at the Contractor’s expense.
END OF SECTION
Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 16010-10 Job No. D00CO68AD00CO68C